Home

3Com 800ix-SMP Dishwasher User Manual

1. 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 9 RDN LE Service redundancy 7 RLS Display Redundant LES specific info Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Redundant LES id Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 2 15970 Format or Range The internal LES id number For more information see Display Redundant LES General Information on page 277 2 1 5 9 7 parameter The specific redundant LES information is displayed Information is displayed as shown in the example The following information is displayed ES ATM Address od Connection State ES Location Time since Number of Number of Reset LES Number of RESE RESE Allowed 700000000003c0000a000000000c0da7 920901 ocal LES instance umber of Active Clients Last Active msg Nessedes sent oto i messages rcvd by LI al ELANs attached to LES ee al ESTABLISH INTERNAL ik Sec eal ea nn Sy Ae ey LAN Emulation Redundancy 279 Redundant LES General Parameters Table 38 describes the redundant LES general parameters Table 38 Redundant LES General Parameters Parameter Description LES ATM Address Connection State LES Location Local LES Instance Number of Active Clients Ti
2. Des NCCI NE 47 00 00 00 00 00 3c 00 00 a0 00 00 00 00 c0 da 34 55 0c 00 318 CHAPTER 10 LEC ELAN ADMISSION SECURITY Delete All LECs from Security List Delete all LECs from the security list of the specified ELAN for the current session Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 2 STB Security tables entries 2 DET Delete elan security table Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 See Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 Direct access sequence 2 3 2 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The LECs are removed from the ELAN security list System message display ELAN elan 6591 12 successfully deleted Example Enter 2 3221 All LECs are removed from the ELAN security list of the ELAN with ID 1 Add All Joined LECs to Security List Adds all currently connected LECs to the security list of the specified ELAN for the current session with the Accept join privilege Use this command to initialize the ELAN security list Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 2 STB Security tables entries 3 CUR Add curr conn LECs Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 See Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283
3. 3 At the Switch Setup Menu prompt enter 1 46 CHAPTER 4 USING THE LOCAL MANAGEMENT APPLICATION Direct Access to Submenus The Password Setup Menu is displayed as follows followed by the path 1 SYS 1 SET 1 Pas and the gt prompt These menu items are all configuration commands none of them have arrows to the right CB9000 switch module Password Setup Menu 1 REA Set Read access Password 2 WRI Set Write access Password 3 ADM Set Admin access Password 4 PAS Set Password Config to factory defaults Main Back in menus 1 SYS 1 SET 1 PAS gt 1 4 At the Password Setup Menu prompt enter 1 The prompt for the new read password is displayed as follows Enter the new read password This completes the menu sequence Entering the Command Parameters Now refer to section B in the Command Description on page 18 This section explains which parameters to enter and the format to use At the Enter the new read password prompt enter the new password in a format of up to eight alphanumeric characters At the Enter the new read password again prompt enter the new password again exactly as before Command Results After the command executes successfully a system message is displayed The password has been changed The command results and systems messages are shown in section D in Command Description on page 18 in the About This Guide
4. Enter menu sequence 1 1 NCF Node Configuration CHR Characteristics LEV Level 3 3 1 2 SNL Set Node Level al Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range PNNI node level 0 to 104 Direct access sequence 11943312 Command Result System action taken The current node level is updated System message display Node lt x gt of lt y gt Current node level is set to lt n gt Example Enter 1 19 4 3 312 80 The following message is 7displayed Node 1 of 1 Current Node Level is set to 80 The node level of node 1 is set to 80 342 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Get ATM Address Displays the ATM address of the current PNNI node Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI Enter menu sequence 1 3 NCF Node Configuration 3 CHR Characteristics ADD ATM Address 2 1 GAD Get ATM Address Direct access sequence 11943321 Command Result System action taken The current PNNI node and its ATM address are displayed System message display PNNI Node lt x gt of lt y gt PNNI Node ATM Address lt address gt Example Enter 1 1943321 The following message is displayed PNNI Node 1 of 1 PNNI Node ATM Address 47 00 00 00 00 00 3C 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 C0 DA 60 1B 9F FF Set Default ATM Address Sets the last six bytes ESI End System Identi
5. 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 3 ELN ELANs Information 3 ADD Clients MAC Addresses Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter ELAN ID LEC ID Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Format or Range 1 16 For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 o For all 2 2 3 3 parameters The Primary ATM Address MAC address and ATM addresses for the specified ELAN and LEC ID are displayed Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 2 23210 The MAC and ATM addresses for all LECs of the ELAN with ELAN ID 1 are displayed as follows TECLD 2 2 Piewimeuey AWM wekehes 47 0 0 0 06050 0 0 0 0 0 0 O c0 ca 18 1 0 MAC address ATM address 0 CO ca Le 1 0 AT sOsOsO50 0 0 06 050c050 0 Ove cass e50 KA KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKKKKKKKKKKK TECDE 1 Praman YAM wekeheg 7 0 0 0 96050 0 0 0 0 0 0 O cOaca 18 4 0 MAC address ATM address WO C0 Cl 13 4 0 BT50 050 9500 0 0 0 050 0 O60 ca IS 4ce 0 KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKK 304 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION LAN Emulation Statistics Display LAN Emulation Statistics You can view and perform operations on the LAN Emulation statistics as follows m Display LAN Emulation Statis
6. Address specified peer group Length The number of significant bits of the specific summary ATM address that are used for route calculation Supp Indicates whether or not to suppress the address No propagates the address to the peer group Yes does not advertise the address State Indicates whether or not the summary address is currently being advertised to the peer group The state may be Advertising Suppressing or Inactive 408 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Table 55 Parameter PTSE Table Parameters Statistics Section Description DTL Count Originator Crankback Count Originator Alternate DTL Count Originator Route Fail Count Originator Route Fail Unreachable Originator The total number of DTL stacks that this switching system has originated and placed into signaling messages This value includes the number of alternate route DTL stacks see Alternate DTL Count Originator below The total number of connection setup messages including DTL stacks originated by this switching system that have cranked back to this switching system at all levels of the hierarchy The number of alternate route DTL stacks computed by this switching system in response to crankbacks The total number of times that the switching system failed to compute a viable partial DTL stack as an entry border node for some call It indicates the number of times a call was either cleared or cranked back from this swit
7. The value of the ABR optimization parameter is updated to 4 Set Optimization for Updates the Unspecified Bit Rate UBR optimization parameter A change UBR to the UBR optimization parameter takes place immediately Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration Enter menu sequence 1 1 9 4 3 5 OPT Optimization Metrics 2 SOP Set Optimization Metrics 5 OUR Optimization for UBR 5 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range constant bit rate 0 6 Direct access sequence 11 9 4 3 5 2 5 parameters Command Result System action taken The UBR optimization parameter is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt New value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 19435255 The following message is displayed Default Value is O opt_admin_weight New value is 5 opt_clr_clp0 Press ENTER to continue The value of the UBR optimization parameter is updated to 5 382 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Optimization for Resets all the optimization parameters to their default values All Classes to Default Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 5 OPT Optimization Metri
8. Parameter Description Total LECS client no Max LECS client no Total reject requests Total config req responded with OK Total config req responded with ERR The number of clients currently connected to the LECS When all LE clients are up this parameter is 0 The maximum number of clients that may be connected to the LECS The number of clients whose request to join the LECS was rejected The number of requests that received an OK response The number of requests that received an ERR response Signaling Statistics Parameters Table 34 describes the signaling statistics parameters Table 34 LECS Signaling Statistics Parameter Description CONNECT The number of transmitted received CONNECT messages from to LECS LES BUS SETUP The number of transmitted received SETUP messages from to LECS LES BUS 264 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Table 34 LECS Signaling Statistics continued Parameter Description RELEASE ADD PARTY ADD PARTY ACK ADD PARTY RE DROP PARTY Example Enter 2 1 6 The number of transmitted received RELEASE messages from to LECS LES BUS The number of transmitted received ADD PARTY messages from to LECS LES BUS The number of transmitted received ADD PARTY ACK messages from to LECS LES BUS The number of transmitted received ADD PARTY RE messages from to LECS LES BUS The number of transmitted received DROP PARTY messages from to LECS LES BUS T
9. on page 143 in the Operations Guide The startup delay takes effect at the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform config 1 SET Switch setup 5 SLE LE setup 4 RDN LE Service redundancy setup 3 LRD Set LE Service redundancy startup delay Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Startup Delay Seconds Default is 600 seconds Direct access sequence 115 4 3 parameters Command Result System action taken The startup delay for the LANE redundancy facility is set for the next reboot System message display Startup Delay Changed Example Enter 1 15 4 3 600 The following message is displayed Startup Delay Changed The startup delay for the LANE redundancy facility in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch is set to 600 seconds 224 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION LANE Version of Switch Get Switch LANE Version By default the switch comes up as LANE 2 0 but it is possible to toggle between the two versions 1 0 and 2 0 The changes relate to the switch not to a specific ELAN Displays the current LANE version of the switch The possibilities are 1 0 and 2 0 Command Actions Enter menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display 2 LEM LAN Emulation 4 LVR Lane Version of Switch 1 GLV Get switch lane version The LANE versio
10. 1 ESTABLISH 274 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Redundant ELANs General Parameters Table 35 describes the ELANs general parameters Table 35 Redundant ELANs General Parameters Parameter Description Id Name State LES Id amp State PRM LES Id amp State SCN The ELAN Id number The ELAN name The state of the ELAN This can be Primary Secondary In Check when the ELAN is in transient state or No LES The primary LES Id number and its state This can be Establish There is a connection between the LECS and the LES Being Established A connection is being established between the LECS and the LES No connection There is no connection between the LECS and the LES The secondary LES Id number and its state This can be Establish Being Established and No connection see above Display Redundant ELANSs Specific Information Display specific information about Redundant ELANs Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 9 RDN LE Service redundancy 5 RLG Display Redundant ELANs specific info Direct access sequence 2 1 5 9 5 parameter Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Redundant ELAN id Format or Range The internal ELAN id number For more information see Display Redundant ELANs General Information on page 273 Command Result Syst
11. CFP Configure PNNI Enter menu sequence 1 1 9 4 3 NCF Node Configuration 3 CHR Characteristics NID Node ID 4 2 SDF Set Default Node ID Direct access sequence 11943342 Command Result System action taken The current PNNI node id is set to the default address NI Node 1 of 1 Node ID was set to EFAULT lt address gt As System message display is Example Enter 1 1943342 The following message is displayed PNNI Node 1 of 1 Node ID was set to DEFAULT 48 A0 47 00 00 00 00 00 3C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 C0O DA 60 27 F6 FF 350 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Node ID b gt Updates the ID of the PNNI node to anew address A change to the node ID takes place after the administrative status is set to UP or after the next reboot For more information see Set Node Administrative Status to UP on page 337 There are several PNNI operations in the LMA that can only be performed when the node administrative status is set to DOWN and that take effect immediately after the status is reset to UP These include updating the ATM address updating the PNNI node id and updating the node level Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration CHR Characteristics NID Node ID 3 SID Set Node ID Enter menu sequence 1 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter
12. Display Current IP Configuration Switch Command Actions Enter the menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 1 1 2 1 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup MNG Management Setup SIP IP Setup 1 GIP Get IP Address 1 1 2 1 11211 The current IP address is displayed Current IP address The following message is displayed Current IP address 151 104 78 86 The current IP address is displayed Update IP Address b gt AN Setting Up for Management 57 Update the IP address of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The default factory IP address is 0 0 0 0 The IP address is changed after the next reboot Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup MNG Management setup SIP IP Setup 2 1 2 SIP Set IP Address ih Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range IP Address Valid IP address Direct access sequence 1 1 2 1 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The IP address is updated System message display IP address was successfully set for next reboot Example Enter 1 1 2 1 2 100 0 2 2 The following message is displayed IP address was successfully set for next reboot The IP address is updated to 100 0 2 2 and takes effect after the next reboot CAUTION Make s
13. LOL LECS ordered list 2 AOL Add to LECS ordered list Enter menu sequence 1 1 5 3 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range LECS ATM Address ATM address Direct access sequence 1 1 5 3 2 parameter Command Result System action taken The LECS is added to the LECS order database System message display Redundant LECS added Example Enter 1 15 3 2 47 00 00 00 00 00 3c 00 00 a0 00 00 00 00 a0 3e 00 00 01 00 Redundant LECS added The LECS is entered into the LECS order database 220 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Delete LECS from LECS Order Database gt Delete a LECS from the LECS order database in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Enter the index of the LECS address as it appears in the LECS order database To display the database see Display LECS Redundancy on page 218 If the last LECS is deleted from the LECS order database a warning message is displayed informing you that the database is empty Command Actions SYS Platform config SET Switch setup SLE LE setup 3 LOL LECS ordered list 3 DOL Del from LECS ordered list Enter menu sequence 1 1 5 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range LECS index 0 4 Direct access sequence 1 1 5 3 3 parameter Command Result System action taken The LECS is deleted from the LECS order databa
14. M bps over UTP5 card Port Interface edia type Operational Port Frame CIK Loop id type status status mode mode mode SPALAT OCTO M fiber Up amp Connect Disabled SONE Lpt one Boul OCS SSE M fiber Up amp Connect Enabled SONE Lpt one STIS OCS SSE M fiber Up Enabled SONET Lpt one yd OCSE SE M fiber Up Enabled SONE Lpt one iA sb OCI ZSE M fiber Up Enabled SONE Lpt one DANZ 155 RJ45 UTP_5 Copper User Up Enabled SONE pt one Binraas ot exist Enabled SONE pt one 5r 24 ot exist Enabled SONE pt one 96 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Set Port Frame Mode Set the interface mode of the selected port as SDH or SONET and save to flash memory You are prompted to specify a port and a mode Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 5 IFC Interface Cards 3 SFM Set Port Frame Mode Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID slot group port 0 0 For all Frame Mode o SDH 1 SONET Direct access sequence 1 5 3 parameters Command Result System action taken The frame mode of the selected port on the interface module is set and saved System message display Setting port frame mode has completed successfully CAUTION When setting the port frame mode on one of the ports of an OC 3c or 155 M bps over UTP5 card all four ports are automatically updated even if only one port was selected E
15. Sets the M PS p6 hold down time parameter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 2 MPC MPOA Client Configuration 7 MP6 Set hold down time Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter hold down time Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Format or Range 30 1200 seconds 2527 The hold down time parameter is set Parameter changed successfully LAN EMULATION CONFIGURATION SERVICE LECS OPERATIONS This section describes how to configure LAN Emulation Configuration Service LECS Operations in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch m LECS Address m LECS Search Policy m LECS ELAN Database Operations m LAN Emulation Redundancy For more information about configuring the LAN Emulation Configuration Services LECS see Chapter 8 LAN Emulation in the Operations Guide LECS Address AN You can configure the resident LECS address as follows m Display Resident LECS Address m Update Resident LECS Address CAUTION Before you reboot the switch wait three minutes after each LECS update operation to allow the change to be stored in flash 244 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Display Resident LECS Display the address of the resident LECS Address Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Config Service 1 LGA Get resident L
16. http www 3com com Part No DUA C900 1FAA04 Published August 1999 CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Management Guide Software Release 3 0 3Com Corporation 5400 Bayfront Plaza Santa Clara California 95052 8145 Copyright 1999 3Com Corporation All rights reserved No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work such as translation transformation or adaptation without written permission from 3Com Corporation 3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change 3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty term or condition of any kind either implied or expressed including but not limited to the implied warranties terms or conditions of merchantability satisfactory quality and fitness for a particular purpose 3Com may make improvements or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this documentation at any time If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation it is furnished under a license agreement included with the product as a separate document in the hard copy documentation or on the removable media in a directory file named LICENSE TXT or LICENSE TXT If you are unable to locate a copy please contact 3Com and a
17. 1 1 9 4 Direct access sequence 119471 Command Result System action taken All PTSE messages in the database are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example 406 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI PTSE Table Parameters Table 50 through Table 56 describe the parameters displayed in the PTSE table For clarity the information has been divided into different sections Table 50 PTSE Table Parameters PTSE Section Parameter Description Level Hierarchical level Node The number of the node Node Id The node id in hex 22 bytes ATM Address MAC Address PTSE Id Length Type Seq no CkSum Lifetime Description The ATM address of the node 19 bytes The MAC address of the node 6 bytes The PTSE id The length of the PTSE in bytes PTSE type This may be one of the following 96 Nodal state parameters 97 Nodal information group 224 Internal reachable ATM addresses 256 Exterior reachable ATM addresses 288 Horizontal links 289 Uplinks 640 System Capabilities PTSE sequence number Checksum The PTSE checksum includes the logical node ID and the Originating Node s Peer Group ID from the PTSP header as well as the entire contents of the PTSE including the PTSE header and excludes the PTSE remaining lifetime The remaining lifetime of the PTSE in tenths of a second A brief description of the type of PTSE
18. 119473 All links for each node whose information is stored in the database are displayed Information is displayed as shown in the example Topology Link PTSE Table Parameters For a full description of all the parameters displayed in the node information table see Table 51 PTSE Table Parameters Node Topology Link Section Example Enter 11947 3 The following information is displayed 1 4 48a0 47 00000000003c00000000eece 00c0da000001 Level 72 Topology Node 1 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c000000000000 00c0da600047 ff LocPort RemPort Remote node al 1 48a0 47 00000000003c00000000eeEee 00c0da000001 ff 2 2 48a0 47 00000000003c00000000eeee 00c0da000001 ff 3 1 48a0 47 00000000003c000002000000 00c0da000004 ff Node 2 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c00000000eeee 00c0da000001 ff LocPort RemPort Remote node il 1 48a0 47 00000000003c000000000000 00c0da600047 ff 2 2 48a0 47 00000000003c000000000000 00c0da600047 ff 3 1 48a0 47 00000000003c000003000000 00c0da000002 ff 4 1 48a0 47 00000000003c000004000000 00c0da000003 ff Node 3 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c000002000000 00c0da000004 ff LocPort RemPort Remote node 1 3 48a0 47 00000000003c000000000000 00c0da600047 ff 2 2 48a0 47 00000000003c000003000000 00c0da000002 ff Node 4 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c000003000000 00c0da000002 ff LocPort RemPort Remote node i 3 48a0 47 00000000003c00000000eCeee 00c0da000001 ff 2 2 48a0 47 00000000003c000002000000 00c0da00
19. 3 1 or 4 0 176 Update Signaling Protocol Version CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Update the signaling protocol version of the ports of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch and save it to flash Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 4 SIG Signaling setup 5 SPS Signaling protocol configuration setup 4 SPV Set protocol version Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt Enter 0 0 for all ports Protocol version o for version 3 0 1 for version 3 1 2 for version 4 0 Confirmation Yorn Direct access sequence 114 5 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The signaling protocol version is updated for the specified port System message display Signaling Protocol Version was successfully set Example Enter 1145 4 3 1 2 2 The following prompt is displayed This operation will release all connections of the specified port s Are you sure Y N Y Enter x to confirm n to cancel The following message is displayed Signaling Protocol Version was successfully set The signaling protocol version for port 3 1 2 is updated to 4 0 and saved Display Call Proceeding Enable Value Signaling Setup 177 Display the value of the call proceeding enable value With the call proceeding enable value the user can suppress the call proceeding Message that is returne
20. Display LECS Search Policy You can configure the LECS search policy Display the search policy of the resident LECS according to which a LES address is assigned to a LEC that requests to join an ELAN When a LEC applies to the LECS to join an ELAN it can supply the following information to assist the LECS m The ATM address of the LES with which it wants to communicate over an ELAN m TheMAC address of the LES with which it wants to communicate over an ELAN m The name of the ELAN it wants to join Accordingly there are three possible search policies that the LECS can execute 1 The LECS searches for an ELAN whose LES has the required ATM address 2 The LECS searches for an ELAN that contains the LES with the required MAC address The LECS searches for an ELAN with the required name These three policies are tried by the LECS in order If one does not succeed the next is tried Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Config Service 3 LGP LECS Get policy Direct access sequence 2 1 3 Command Result System action taken The search policy of the resident LECS is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 2 1 3 The search policy of the resident LECS is displayed First lecs search policy is Second lecs search policy is Third lecs search policy is by ATM address by Mac Address by Ela
21. Edited by Benjamin Mann and Debbie Zioni Illustrated by Pearl Goldberg CONTENTS ABOUT THIS GUIDE Conventions 16 Command Description 18 Related Documents 20 CoreBuilder 9000 Documents 20 World Wide Web Site Documents 22 3Com Facts Automated Fax Service Documents 23 Year 2000 Compliance 23 OVERVIEW CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Characteristics 25 The ATM Switch Fabric Module 25 Interfacesto ATM 26 Processors 27 Device Management 28 Traffic Management 28 ATM Networks 29 Software Release 3 0 Key Features 30 Standards and Protocols Supported 31 ATM 31 Protocols 31 STARTING UP Safety Precautions 33 Laser and LED Safety Information 34 ESD Safety Information 34 Handling Precautions 34 Pr cautions de S curit 35 Information sur la Pr vention de D charges lectrostatiques 35 Pr cautions de M anipulation 36 Sicherheitsvorkehrungen 36 Sicherheitsinformationen f r Elektrostatische Entladungen 37 Vorkehrungen beim Umgang mit dem Modul 37 Installation 38 Installation Prerequisites 38 Installing the Daughter Cards 38 Installing the ATM Interface Module into the Chassis 38 INTEGRATED FAST SETUP CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Integrated Fast Setup 39 Setup Procedure Sections 40 Entering Data 40 Navigation Aids 40 Integrated Fast Setup Operation 40 USING THE LOCAL MANAGEMENT APPLICATION Management Capabilities 41 Starting Up 41 LMA Access Level 42 Logging In 42 The LMA Menu System 44
22. If the cache is disabled it is not refreshed and calls are not added to it This means that for each incoming call a new path will be recalculated A change to the DTL cache state takes place immediately Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 6 SCR Set Route Cache UBR Configuration 2 SCS Set Cache Stat Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Cache state 0 enable 1 disable Direct access sequence 119 4 6 2 Command Result System action taken The DTL cache state is updated to disabled enabled System message display PNNI cache DISABLED ENABLED Example Enter 1194621 The following message is displayed PNNI cache ENABLED Press ENTER to continue Get Cache Refresh for ADD PARTY Configuring the Route Cache 401 Displays whether or not the last cache accumulated for a route between the same source and any destination that has previously been accessed will continue to be used when an ADD PARTY route is added Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 6 SCR Set Route Cache UBR Configuration 3 GCS Get Cache Refresh for ADD PARTY Direct access sequence 119 4 6 3 Command Result System action taken The PNNI cache is upd
23. LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 9 RDN LE Service redundancy 2 DLS Delete Redundant LES Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter ELAN name Format or Range Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 Direct access sequence 2 1 5 9 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The specified LES is deassigned as the secondary LES for the specified ELAN in the LECS database System message display Redundant LES removed Example Enter 2 1 5 The following 9 2 elan73_9 message is displayed Redundant LES removed The specified ELAN in the L LES is deassigned as the secondary LES for the specified ECS database Make Primary LES Active gt i gt Reestablish the primary LES of the ELAN as the active LES When the secondary LES of an ELAN is active instead of the primary LES this command causes LECs to be released from the secondary LES to join the primary LES Specify the ELAN name of the primary LES A secondary LES becomes the active LES on the failure of the primary LES and it remains active even when the primary LES recovers To perform this command the ELAN must be in secondary state and it must be redundant You need to perform this command on all CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switches with active LECS and verify the result Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation
24. PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration TIM Timers 10 AMT AvCR Minimum Threshold 4 3 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range percentage 1 99 Direct access sequence 11 9 4 3 4 10 parameters Command Result System action taken The AvCR minimum threshold is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 1943 4 10 15 The following message is displayed Default Value is 3 new value is 15 Press ENTER to continue Set CDV Proportional Multiplier Sets the CDV proportional multiplier percentage The CDV proportional multiplier percentage is the percentage difference in the Cell Delay Variation metrics from the last value advertised A change to the CDV proportional multiplier percentage value takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 4 TIM Timers 11 CDV CDV Proportional Multiplier 3 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range percentage 1 99 Direct access sequence 119 4 3 4 11 parameters Command Result System action taken The CDV proportional multiplier is displayed and is updated to its new value System message displ
25. SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI 1 9 4 3 NCF Node Configuration 3 CHR Characteristics 3 PID Peer Group ID 2 SPI Set Peer Group ID 3 Direct access sequence 11943332 Command Result System action taken None System message display Peer Group ID can only be changed via the Node Level and ATM address network prefix Example Enter 11943332 The following message is displayed Peer Group ID can only be changed via the Node Level and ATM address network prefix 348 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Get Node ID Displays the ID ATM address of the PNNI node 22 bytes Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration CHR Characteristics 4 NID Node ID 1 GID Get Node ID Direct access sequence 11943341 Command Result System action taken The current PNNI node id is displayed System message display PNNI Node x of y Node ID lt address gt Example Enter 1 1943341 The following message is displayed PNNI Node 1 of 1 NodeID 48 A0 47 00 00 00 00 4C 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 C0 DA 60 1B 9F FF Set Default Node ID Updates the ID of the PNNI node to the default address A change to the default node ID takes place after the next reboot Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup
26. Set arp policy for non reg RD 22317 296 8 Reset saved configuration 22318 297 8 Get LANE multicast fwd delay 22319 298 8 Set LANE multicast fwd delay 223110 299 8 Clients info 2232 300 8 Clients MAC addresses 2233 302 8 LANE Statistics General LE statistics 22341 304 8 LEC statistics 22 8 ws 306 8 Reset general LE statistics 22343 308 8 Multicast addresses 2235 309 8 430 APPENDIX B MENU INDEX Table 64 M enu Index continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter Destroy specific LEC 2236 310 8 LES edit elans parameters 224 286 8 LES restart ELAN 225 311 8 LANE Security Configuration Get elan default behavior 23 4 1 314 8 Set elan default behavior 2312 315 8 Display elan security table 2321 316 8 Delete elan security table 23 BAD 318 8 Add currently connected LECs 2323 319 8 Add a new security entry 2324 320 8 Edit a security entry 263 25 321 8 Delete a security entry 2326 322 8 Perform a security check 2327 323 8 Get switch security state 23 37 324 8 Set switch security state 2332 325 8 Save security configuration 234 326 8 Restore security configuration 235 327 8 LANE Version of Switch Get switch lane version 241 224 8 Set switch lane version 242 225 8 MPOA Devices Configuration Display current config 2514 226 8 Table 64 M enu Index continued D
27. Statis treSk DTL Count Originator CrankBack Count Originator Alternate DIL Count Originator Route Fail Count Originator a PE A T RouteFail UnreachabeOriginator ATM SWITCH FABRIC MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Physical Table 57 ATM Switch Fabric Module Specifications Specification Metric Imperial Height 38 8 cm 15 3 in Width 3 81 cm 1 5 in Depth 32 7 cm 12 8 in Weight 1700 g 3 74 Ib Environmental Table 58 Environmental Specifications Specification Metric Imperial Operating Temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 to 104 F 10 to 90 noncondensing 20 C to 70 C 4 to 163 F 95 maximum relative humidity Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity noncondensing Safety Table 59 Safety Specifications Specification Standard Agency Certifications m UL1950 CSA 22 2 No 1950 EN 60950 IEC 825 1 825 2 PCB UL 94V 0 ANSI IPC RB 276 class 2 Designed to Comply m VDE 0871 part 2 class A EN 55022 with AC Protection m 20 amp circuit breaker 422 APPENDIX A ATM SWITCH FABRIC MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Electromagnetic Compatibility Table 60 Electromagnetic Compatibility Specification Standard m Meets FCC part 15 Subparagraph B Class A limits m Directive complied with EMC 89 336 EEC as amended by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC m Emission EN50081 1 EN55022 m Immunity EM 50082 1 IEC801 2 3 4 Standards Supported Table 61 Standar
28. The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch has the following key features Distributed output buffering An ATM switching engine that provides full rate non blocking switching for up to 22 OC 12c STM 4 ATM ports and up to 88 OC 3c STM 1 155 Mbps SONET SDH ports A self routing switching architecture built on top of an 560 Gbps full duplex passive backplane that meets demands for higher port density faster data speeds and scalability m Seamless full rate multicast support Cell Loss Priority CLP support for congestion management Dynamic threshold mechanism for CLP EFCI marking ready EPD hardware ready PPD hardware ready A back pressure control mechanism Policy support VCI VPI Hardware ready 4096 VCs for each OC 3c port 4096x4 for each OC 12c port Two levels of priority dynamic allocation of cell buffer priority and scheduling capability per priority per port Switch Management via PCM CIA card with terminal connection status indicator M anagement Features a SNMP Telnet and Transcend Enterprise M anager a Multiple agents with single management entry point m RMON and RMON2 a Statistics Gathering and Reporting Management Interfaces m 1OBASE T RJ 45 Ethernet m RS 232 DB 9 control port Management Applications m TranscendWare management applications software Terminal emulation local Standards and Protocols Supported 31 m MIBs Supported MIB II ATOM MIB RMON MIB Interface Evolution MIB NCDC
29. To perform this task Type or Press Clear the value of the parameter that you just entered lt Clear the values of all the parameters in the list that you gt just entered Retrieve a previous command Up arrow Get the next command Down arrow Delete the character that precedes the insertion point Backspace Delete the character that follows the insertion point Del Toggle between Insert and Overwrite modes Ins Clear the command line 5 Escape from prompt 48 CHAPTER 4 USING THE LOCAL MANAGEMENT APPLICATION Logging Out To log out of the LMA enter 7 at the Main Menu prompt Automatic Logout The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch has an automatic logout feature If you do not use the keyboard for 15 minutes the ATM Switch Fabric Module automatically logs you out You cannot adjust the length of time or disable this feature CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM e e ecco This chapter describes how you configure common management tasks for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch platform For a description of the login procedure see Logging In on page 42 m Password Setup Setting Up for Management Setting the Port Network Connection Type Resetting All Parameters Downloading System Software M anaging Switch Fabric Modules Configuring Interface M odules Logging Out and Rebooting ATM Features and Software Versions LECS ATM Address Setting Up the Switch Clock Source Setting Up fo
30. excluding its conflicts of laws principles and excluding the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods 3Com Corporation 5400 Bayfront Plaza Santa Clara CA 95054 408 326 5000
31. 14 SRT SVCC Retry Time 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range initiation time 1 60000 seconds Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 14 parameters Command Result System action taken The SVCC retry time is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt New value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 19 4 3 4 14 20 The following message is displayed Default Value is 30 new value is 20 Press ENTER to continue Set SVCC Calling Integrity Time Sets the SVCC calling integrity time The SVCC calling integrity time is the default value used to initiate the SVCC integrity timer at the node that initiates a switched virtual circuit at a logical group node A change to the SVCC calling integrity time takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 4 TIM Timers 15 SCI SVCC Calling Integrity Time 3 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range integrity time 1 60000 seconds Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 15 parameters Command Result System action taken The SVCC calling integrity time is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 1 9 4 3
32. 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 1 MPS MPOA Server Configuration 1 DIS Display current config 2511 All the current settings of the M PS variables are displayed Information is displayed as shown in the example below The following information is displayed POA Server Configuration 2S joll keep alive time PODA keep alive lifetime POSTPOS internetwork layer protocols PS p4 MPS initial retry time 26 9 MPS retry time maximum 23 10 MPS give up time 2S default holding time 10 seconds 35 seconds TE 5 seconds 40 seconds 40 seconds 20 minutes MPOA Devices Configuration 227 MPOA Server Configuration Parameters Table 29 describes the M POA Server configuration parameters Table 29 MPOA Server Configuration Parameters Variable Name Description MPS p1 keep alive time The MPS must transmit M POA keep alives every M PS p1 seconds Minimum 1 sec default 10 sec maximum 100 sec M PS p2 keep alive lifetime The length of time in seconds an MPC may consider a keep alive valid Minimum 3 sec default 35 sec maximum 1000 sec M PS p3 internetw ork layer The set of protocols for which M POA resolution is supported Default protocols M PS p4 MPS initial retry time Initial retry time used by the M POA retry mechanism Minimum 1 sec default 5 sec maximum 300 sec M PS p5 MPS retry time Maximum r
33. 2 11 1 1 0 The list of all calls at port 1 1 1 is displayed There is one P2M call with two additional destinations Goulklimcaaeal Canni Nicis Siaa CLE a oao Iim In Out Econ OU ROUT id type state out VPI VCI conn conn VPI VCI conn conn cons port mbr al PVC P2M Active 3 H N 0 40 Liko i ea TA GO s S 0 SO lt ia Se yA LO Ki A Example Display Info for a Specific PVC Call Enter 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 The details of call with Call number 1 are displayed There is one P2M call with two additional destinations Call number 1 Call type PVC P2M Call state Active number of out connections 9 j2reakoneshiewee H Gillie Time of last change of operational state 1429560 msec In connection VPI fae S a Key 3 In connection VCI 4 In connection port lt lt a eles Ou Ou Ou Ou Ou Ou Ou Ou Ou connection VPI al connection VCI 60 connection port Sil dl connection VPI connection VCI 5 connection port lt a ele eS connection VPI connection VCI 4 CP Aer CR eR oP tr Ao Te eH connection port Sl Agee 144 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Call Parameters Name Table 20 shows the call parameters displayed by the command Table 20 Call Parameters Description Call number Call Type Call State Number of Out Connections Priority CLL Cell Loss Level In Connection VPI In Connection VCI In Connection Port In Connecti
34. 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The specified LECs are added to the ELAN security list System message display Entry added successfully Example Enter 2 3 2 4 1 47 0 0 0 0 0 3c 0 0 a0 2 The following message is displayed Entry added successfully The LECs with the specified network prefix are added to the ELAN security list for the ELAN with ID 1 with join privilege Reject Change the Join Privilege of a LEC Changes the join privilege of a LEC or group of LECs for the specified ELAN for the current session Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 2 STB Security tables entries 5 EDR Edit a security entry Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 See Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 Index of LEC i n aces See Display LECs in ELAN Security List on page 316 Join Privilege 1 Accept 2 Reject Continue prompt YorN Direct access sequence 2 3 2 5 parameters Command Result System action taken The join privilege for the specified LEC is changed for the ELAN System message display Entry updated successfully Example Enter 2 325132 The join privilege of the LEC with index 3 in the security list for the ELAN with ID 1 is changed to Reject The following prompt is displayed Entry is 47 00 00 00 00 00 3c 00 00 a0
35. 4 1 1 1 1 The following information is displayed Port number lt i oil SIGNALING ILMI ax transmit SDU size in bytes umber of transmitted SDUs ax received SDU size in bytes Number of SDUs received without errors Number of PDUs received with CRC 32 errors Number of oversized PDUs OG O OLO SS Soo oo 2S Number of buffers shortage errors 204 CHAPTER 8 VIEWING STATISTICS Reset Control Frame Port Statistics Resets control frame statistics for a specified port Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 4 STS Statistics 4 CTL Control Frames 2 RST Reset Control Frames Counters Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or 0 0 For all ports Direct access sequence 4 42 Command Result System action taken The AAL Layer control statistics for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch are reset System message display Reset counters completed successfully Example Enter 4 4 2 1 1 1 The following message appears Reset counters completed successfully The AAL5 layer control statistics are reset for port 1 1 1 Signaling Protocol Statistics Display Signaling Protocol Statistics You can display the following signaling statistics m Display Signaling Protocol Statistics m Reset Signaling Counters For information about signaling protocol see Signaling Protocol on page 89 in the Operations Guide
36. 5 2 elan_73_9 The following information is displayed elan_type 802 3 max_f_size 1516 ELAN Parameters in LECS Database Table 32 describes the ELAN parameters in the LECS database Table 32 ELAN Parameters in LECS Database Name Description ELAN Type The type of frames that the ELAN recognizes m 802 3 Ethernet type m 802 5 Token Ring type a VLT Max Frame Size LAN Type Frame Length Bytes Ethernet Fast Ethernet 1516 Token Ring 4560 4M b 18240 16M b FDDI 4544 Update ELAN Update the parameters for the specified ELAN in the LECS database For Parameters in LECS more information see Table 32 for a description of the ELAN parameters Database that you can update CAUTION After you update the parameters of an ELAN in the LECS N database you must use the LMA to update the parameters of the ELAN in the LES database in exactly the same way 252 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 3 EET Edit ELAN type amp params Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 ELAN type 1 Ethernet 2 Token ring ELAN max frame size 1 1516 2 4544 3 9234 5 1580 Direct access sequence 2 1 5 3 parameters Command Result System a
37. 92 288 I 4dbb 35861 Horizont Link 4 92 200 It ZI 39199 Horizont Link 5 92 Zier AL flb4 35584 Horizont Link 34 76 A2 2 SISO BHoils Int Reach Addr Node 3 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c000002000000 00c0da000004 ff PTSE_Id Length Type Seq no CkSum Lifetime Description ale 68 S7 2 Slona SoZ yclall AEREO 2 92 288 1 39a 95550 Horizont Link 3 2 21010 R dea5 35648 Horizont Link 34 VES 224 2 else S5520 Int Reach Addr Node 4 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c000003000000 00c0da000002 ff PTSE_Id Length Type Seq no CkSum Lifetime Description il 68 7 2 cheats S57 Sil ocal Iino 2 92 isis ik LAs OSGA Horizont Link 5 OZ 288 1 dea5 35671 Bove AOE Ibyal inilke 34 BS 224 2 G25 OSSA Int Reach Addr Node 5 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c000004000000 00c0da000003 ff PTSE_Id Length Type Seq no CkSum Lifetime Description i 68 ST 2 dda6 35850 odal Inform 2 92 2910 Tl ilon 35665 HORT AONE g aL eK 34 52 2 iL S74 S5314 Int Reach Addr 412 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Display Topology Link Information Displays all links for each node whose information is stored in the topology database Command Actions Enter menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 1 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 7 SHO Show PNNI information 3 TOP Topology Link PTSEs
38. ATM Address Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ATM address member id lt slotgroupportOn gt Direct access sequence 3 4 2 3 parameters Command Result System action taken The specified ATM address is deleted from specified port System message display ATM address member lt n gt was deleted from port lt x x x gt Example Enter 3 4 2 3 11101 The following message is displayed ATM address member 11101 was deleted from port 1 1 1 The ATM address with member number 11101 is deleted from the MIB at port 1 1 1 Get ATM Addresses at Get the manual ATM addresses at a specific port Port Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM addresses 2 STP Static ATM Addresses Setup 4 STC Get ATM Addresses at Port Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt 0 0 for all ports Direct access sequence 3 4 2 4 Command Result System action taken The manual ATM addresses at the specified port or all ports are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 3 4 2 4 0 0 The following information is displayed Borte ATM address Network prefix ATM address user_part member man number number KT Zig kelaa AT Wa Oz lt a le OORO OO o OTOC AOF ORDA E E E a TOTES o T E T E E E Noh a a OTNES UME Parameters Tab
39. ATM Networks CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Characteristics 29 Mechanisms for Handling Congestion The following mechanisms are used to manage congestion in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Fabric M odule m Back Pressure Partial Packet Drop PPD Hardware ready Early Packet Drop EPD Hardware ready Call Admission CLP based Cell Discard The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch supports the following types of ATM networks Classical IP CLIP ATM The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch is transparent to CLIP and allows you to use CLIP over the ATM network For a view of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch when CLIP is used over ATM within a network see Chapter 3 ATM Network Basics in the Operations Guide Virtual Networks The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch handles virtual networks across the enterprise using ATM and LAN Emulation LANE Segments in a virtual network can incorporate legacy LANs and ATM devices using LANE allowing you to organize network users into logical groups regardless of their physical location Using this feature you can set up workgroups comprised of members from various departments or business units around the enterprise and centralize servers into server farms for better administration For more information about virtual networks see Chapter 3 ATM Network Basics in the Operations Guide 30 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Software Release 3 0 Key Features
40. ATM addresses as follows Display User Management Entities UME ATM Addresses at Port Display Static ATM Addresses at Port Display De registered ATM Addresses at Port Delete All ATM Addresses at Port Add ATM Address to Port Delete ATM Address by Member ID Get ATM Addresses at Port Delete All Inactive Addresses Display User Management Entities UM E registered ATM addresses for specified ports of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch These ATM addresses were received from end stations or edge devices attached to the port and registered using ILM in the MIB address table For more information see UNI Address Registration on page 52 in the Operations Guide Addresses defined through LMA are not displayed For easy reference each ATM address registered at a port is assigned a member ID The member ID is made up of the port number followed by a two digit number of the form On where 0 corresponds to the first ATM address registered For example the member ID for the first ATM address registered at port 3 1 3 is 31301 The member ID is useful for displaying information about calls that are associated with the ATM address For example the switched virtual channels SVC are established to the LEC whose ATM address is registered at the port You can use the member ID to get information for the specific port attached to that ATM address Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 1 ADD Get ATM
41. Austria 0800 297468 Netherlands 0800 0227788 Belgium 0800 71429 Norway 800 11376 Denmark 800 17309 Poland 00800 3111206 Finland 0800 113153 Portugal 0800 831416 France 0800 917959 South Africa 0800 995014 Germany 0800 1821502 Spain 900 983125 Hungary 00800 12813 Sweden 020 795482 Ireland 1800 553117 Switzerland 0800 55 3072 Israel 1800 9453794 U K 0800 966197 Italy 1678 79489 Latin America Argentina AT amp T 800 666 5065 M exico 01 800 CARE 01 800 2273 Brazil 0800 13 3266 Peru AT amp T 800 666 5065 Chile 1230 020 0645 Puerto Rico 800 666 5065 Colombia 98012 2127 Venezuela AT amp T 800 666 5065 North America 1 800 NET 3Com 1 800 638 3266 Enterprise Customers 1 800 876 3266 Returning Products for Repair Before you send a product directly to 3Com for repair you must first obtain an authorization number Products sent to 3Com without authorization numbers will be returned to the sender unopened at the sender s expense To obtain an authorization number call or fax Country Telephone Number Fax Number 65 543 6500 31 30 6029900 Asia Pacific Rim 65 543 6348 31 30 6029999 Europe South Africa and Middle East Latin America 1 408 326 2927 1 408 326 3355 From the following countries you may call the toll free numbers select option 2 and then option 2 Austria 0800 297468 Belgium 0800 71429 Denmark 800 17309 Finland 0800 113153 France 0800 917959 Germany 0800 1821502
42. Channel Display ILM I Channel Polling Status Update ILM Channel Polling Status Display ILM I Channel Polling Interval Update ILM Channel Polling Interval For more information about the ILM I Interim Local Management Interface ILM I on page 50 in the Operations Guide 112 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Display ILMI Version Display the ILM I version for the specified port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch For more information see Basic ILM Functions on page 51 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup IME ILMI Setup VER ILMI Version Setup 1 GET Get ILMI Version 1 8 1 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all ports Direct access sequence 1 1 8 1 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The ILM I version for the specified port is displayed System message display ILMI version is lt 3 0 3 1 4 0 gt Example Enter 1 1811 3 1 2 The following message is displayed ILMI version is 3 1 ILMI Setup 113 Update ILMI Version Update the ILM I Version for the specified port in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup IME ILMI Setup VER ILMI Version Setup 2 SET Set amp Save
43. CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch but instead immediately sends the LE_ARP request to all LECs in the ELAN Update LE ARP Update the policy for handling LE_ARP requests for an ELAN Respond or Response Policy Forward Request The new response policy takes effect immediately The factory default value is forward request See Table 42 for a description of LE_ARP policies i gt This is a global setting for all the clients in the specified ELAN Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 3 ELN ELANs Information 1 LSU LES Setup 5 SAR Set amp Save LE arp policy Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter ELAN ID Response policy Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 2 231521 Format or Range 1 16 For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 1 Respond 2 Forward Request For more information see Table 42 2 2 3 1 5 parameters The response policy for the specified ELAN is updated The update takes place immediately arp policy was set arp policy was successfully saved on flash The following messages are displayed arp policy was set arp policy was successfully saved on flash The LE_ARP policy of the ELAN with ELAN ID 2 is updated to Respond 294 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LA
44. Direct access sequence 2 3 2 3 parameters Command Result System action taken The currently connected LECs are added to the ELAN security list System message display Active LECs added into security table successfully Example Enter 2 3231 The following message is displayed Active LECs added into security table successfully The currently connected LECs are added to the ELAN security list for the ELAN with ID 1 320 CHAPTER 10 LEC ELAN ADMISSION SECURITY Add a LEC to Security List Adds a LEC or group of LECs to the security list of the specified ELAN for the current session You specify the join privilege Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 2 STB Security tables entries 4 ADR Add a new security entry Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 See Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 LEC ATM address or A full ATM address of a LEC in the format of 20 bytes separated with dots Network Prefix A prefix of the network part 1 to 13 bytes of an ATM address for a section of the network that is prefix and wildcard The format is 47 0 0 0 0 0 3c 0 0 a0 between 1 12 bytes with at the end or 47 0 0 0 0 0 3c 0 0 a0 0 0 0 exactly 13 bytes long with at the end no Join Privilege 1 Accept 2 Reject Direct access sequence 2 3 2
45. ELAN name and the ATM address of the LES The secondary LES should reside on a different switch than the primary LES For more information see LES Redundancy Facility Configuring the ELAN Topology Database on page 139 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 9 RDN LE Service redundancy 1 ALS Add redundant LES to elan Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 LES ATM address 20 Hex bytes separated by periods Direct access sequence 2 1 5 9 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The specified LES is assigned to be the secondary LES for the specified ELAN in the LECS database System message display Redundant LES successfully added Example Enter 2 1 5 9 1 elan73_9 47 0 0 0 0 0 3 c 0 0 d0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 The following message is displayed Redundant LES successfully added The specified LES is assigned to be the secondary LES for the specified ELAN in the LECS database 270 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Deassign Redundant LES from ELAN Deassign a redundant secondary LES from a specified ELAN in the LECS database Specify the ELAN name associated with the LES Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS
46. Enter 2 1 5 4 3 elan_73_9 12 23 45 67 89 12 The console responds with the confirmation Mac address was added to this elan 256 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Display ELAN ATM Display ATM addresses inserted for a specified ELAN Addresses Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 5 ATM ATM Address Info 1 AAD Display all ATM addresses Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 Direct access sequence 2 1 55 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The ATM addresses inserted for the specified ELAN are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 2 1 5 5 1 admin The following information is displayed Silans aeinn ihe _ackhes 47 0 0 0 0 0 36 0 0 a0 0 0 0 0 c0 da 60 1 a il AY sO UsOsO50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Delete ELAN ATM Address Delete an ATM address inserted by a specified ELAN Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 5 ATM ATM Addresses Info 2 DEL Delete ATM address Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add
47. Enterprise Switch Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 8 IME ILMI Setup 5 POL Polling Setup 2 SST Set Polling Status Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or 0 0 forall ports ILM polling o to disable ILM I polling enable disable 1 to enable ILMI polling Direct access sequence 118 4 2 parameters Command Result System action taken ILMI polling for the selected port is updated and saved System message display ILMI polling is set to lt ENABLED DISABLED gt Example Enter 1 1842 3 1 2 1 The following message is displayed ILMI polling is set to ENABLED The polling status of port 3 1 2 is enabled and is saved to flash 122 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Display ILMI Channel Polling Interval Display the ILM channel polling interval for the specified port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch If enabled the ILM I channel VPI VCI 0 16 is periodically polled for connectivity Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup IME ILMI Setup POL Polling Setup 3 GTO Get Polling Timeout 1 8 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all ports Direct access sequence 1 1 8 4 3 parameters Command
48. Format or Range node id 20 bytes Direct access sequence 119433 4 3 Command Result System action taken The current PNNI node id is set to the new address System message display New Node ID was set Node Id Example Enter 119433 43 47 00 00 00 00 00 3C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CO DA 60 27 F6 F6 The following message is displayed New Node ID was set Node Id 47 00 00 00 00 00 3C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CO DA 60 27 F6 F6 The node ID is updated to its new value The node ID displayed can also be changed by editing the existing node ID This is done by pressing the BackSpace left and or right arrow keys at the prompt and overwriting any of the 20 bytes of the address 352 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Get Node Name Displays the name assigned to the current PNNI node Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration CHR Characteristics 3 5 NAM Node Name 1 GNA Get Node Name Direct access sequence 11943351 Command Result System action taken The current PNNI node number and name are displayed System message display PNNI Node lt x gt of lt y gt Node Name lt name gt Example Enter 11943351 The following message is displayed PNNI Node 1 of 1 Node Name 3Com World Set Node Name Updates the name assigned to the current PNNI node A change the node name take
49. Get ATM Addresses at Port 135 Delete All Inactive Addresses 136 Network Prefix 137 Display Network Prefix 137 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Display Call Routing 140 Display Call Routed to ATM Address 140 Display Port Connections 145 Display UME Address Port Connection 145 Display Static Address Port Connection 148 Display Inactive Address Port Connections 150 Create Permanent Virtual Channel PVC 151 Display PVC VPI VCI Limits 151 Create PVC Full Setup 153 Create PVC Quick Setup 156 Add PVC Destination 157 Release PVC 158 Release PVC Destination 159 Display PVCs 161 Delete All Inactive PVCs 162 Delete All PVC Connections of Port 163 NNI Hops Setup 164 Display Maximum NNI Hops 164 Update Maximum NNI Hops 165 Signaling Setup 166 Display VPI VCI Range 167 Update VPI VCI Range 169 Display Signaling Protocol Profile 171 Update Signaling Protocol Profile 173 Display Signaling Protocol Version 174 Update Signaling Protocol Version 176 Display Call Proceeding Enable Value 177 Update Call Proceeding Enable Value 178 Reset Signaling Configuration 179 Signaling Timers 180 Display Protocol Timer Resolution 180 Update Protocol Timer Resolution 182 Display UNI Signaling Timers 183 Display QSAAL Signaling Timers and Protocol Configuration 185 VIEWING STATISTICS Physical Layer Statistics 189 Display Physical Layer Statistics 190 Reset Physical Layer Statistics 192 ATM Layer Statistics 193 Display Tota
50. Initial Retry Time 240 Set Retry Time Maximum 241 Set Hold Down Time 242 LAN Emulation Configuration Service LECS Operations 243 LECS Address 243 Display Resident LECS Address 244 Update Resident LECS Address 245 LECS Search Policy 246 Display LECS Search Policy 246 LECS ELAN Database Operations 248 Display ELANs 249 Display ELAN Parameters in LECS Database 251 Update ELAN Parameters in LECS Database 252 Display ELAN MAC Addresses 254 Delete ELAN MAC Address 255 Add ELAN MAC Address 256 Display ELAN ATM Addresses 257 Delete ELAN ATM Address 258 Add ELAN ATM Address 259 Add ELAN 260 Delete ELAN 262 Configure Segment ID 263 LECS Database Statistics 264 Reset LECS 266 Display LECS Maximum Connection Number 267 Update LECS Maximum Connection Number 268 LAN Emulation Redundancy 269 Assign Redundant LES to ELAN 270 Deassign Redundant LES from ELAN 271 Make Primary LES Active 272 Display Redundant ELANs General Information 274 Display Redundant ELANs Specific Information 276 Display Redundant LES General Information 278 Display Redundant LES Specific Information 279 LAN Emulation Service LES Operations 281 LES Address 281 Display LES BUS Addresses 281 Update ELAN LES BUS Address 283 ELAN Parameters 284 Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database 284 Update ELAN Parameters in LES Database 287 LE ARP Policy Configuration 289 Display ELAN Response Policy 289 Update ELAN Response Policy 291 Display LE ARP Response Po
51. LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 4 MAC MAC Address Info 2 DEL Delete MAC Address Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 MAC Address 6 Hex bytes separated by dots Direct access sequence 2 1 54 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The MAC address inserted for the selected ELAN is deleted System message display Mac address was deleted for this elan Example Enter 2 1 5 4 2 elan_73_9 12 23 45 67 89 12 The following message is displayed Mac address was deleted for this elan The specified M AC address is deleted from the ELAN Add ELAN MAC Address Add aMAC address to an ELAN MAC address database This database is selected from the real database Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 4 MAC MAC Address Info 3 ADD Add new MAC address Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 MAC Address 6 Hex bytes separated by dots Direct access sequence 2 1 54 3 parameters Command Result System action taken The new MAC address for the specified ELAN database is added System message display Mac address was added to this elan Example
52. Material Authorization RMA number marked on the outside of the package and sent prepaid and packaged appropriately for safe shipment and it is recommended that they be insured or sent by a method that provides for tracking of the package The repaired or replaced item will be shipped to Customer at 3Com s expense not later than thirty 30 days after 3Com receives the defective product Dead or Defective on Arrival In the event a product completely fails to function or exhibits a defect in materials or workmanship within the first forty eight 48 hours of installation but no later than thirty 30 days after the date of purchase and this is verified by 3Com it will be considered dead or defective on arrival DOA and a replacement shall be provided by advance replacement The replacement product will normally be shipped not later than three 3 business days after 3Com s verification of the DOA product but may be delayed due to export or import procedures When an advance replacement is provided and Customer fails to return the original product to 3Com within fifteen 15 days after shipment of the replacement 3Com will charge Customer for the replacement product at list price 3Com shall not be responsible for any software firmware information or memory data of Customer contained in stored on or integrated with any products returned to 3Com for repair whether under warranty or not ADDITIONAL SERVICES 3Com s Web and Bulle
53. Module Getting Started Guide Installing the ATM For complete details on how to install the ATM Interface M odule into the Interface Module into CoreBuilder 9000 chassis see the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Interface the Chassis Module Getting Started Guide e e ecco INTEGRATED FAST SETUP This chapter describes how to use the Integrated Fast Setup procedure to configure the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch allowing it to function in the network CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Integrated Fast Setup gt After you have physically connected the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch to your site network devices and power has been applied you must set some parameters to enable the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch with its attached ATM Interface M odules to function in the network The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch local management software features an Integrated Fast Setup procedure that configures the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch in one continuous process With Integrated Fast Setup you can set up the most important system parameters that you need to start working right away The remaining parameters are assigned default values If you are installing the ATM Switch Fabric Module and ATM Interface M odules at the same time you need to perform the Integrated Fast Setup procedure only once all modules will be configured 40 CHAPTER 3 INTEGRATED FAST SETUP Setup Procedure Ta
54. PARTY 119463 401 13 Set cache state for ADD PARTY 119464 402 13 Get max number of routes per cache 119 4 65 403 13 Set max number of routes per cache 119466 404 13 PNNI Information All PTSEs in database 119471 405 13 Node PTSEs 119472 410 13 Topology Link PTSEs 119473 412 13 Summary address table 119474 414 13 Address PTSEs 119475 415 13 PGL election 119476 417 13 Neighbors 119477 419 13 Statistics 119478 420 13 438 APPENDIX B MENU INDEX TECHNICAL SUPPORT 3Com provides easy access to technical support information through a variety of services This appendix describes these services Information contained in this appendix is correct at time of publication For the most recent information 3Com recommends that you access the 3Com Corporation World Wide Web site Online Technical Services World Wide Web Site 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 3Com offers worldwide product support 24 hours a day 7 days a week through the following online systems m World Wide Web site 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 3Com FIP site 3Com Bulletin Board Service 3Com BBS 3Com Facts Automated Fax Service To access the latest networking information on the 3Com Corporation World Wide Web site enter this URL into your Internet browser http www 3com com This service provides access to online support information such as technical documentation and software as well as support options that range fro
55. PNNI parameters for all interface ports to their default values The parameter reset takes place immediately Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI ICF Interface Configuration 3 SDF Set all interface parameters to defaults Enter menu sequence 1 1 9 4 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Confirm reset yorn Direct access sequence 119 4 4 3 Command Result System action taken All the parameters for all the interface ports are set to their default values System message display All PNNI interface parameters were set to their defaults Example Enter 119443y The following message is displayed All PNNI interface parameters were set to their defaults Managing the Scope Mapping Table 393 Managing the The following commands allow you to manage the scope mapping table Scope Mapping Table m View Scope Mapping Table m Modify Scope Mapping Table m Set Scope Mapping Table to Defaults View Scope Mapping Displays the scope mapping table on the screen Table Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 4 ICF Interface Configuration 5 SMT Scope Mapping Table Configuration 1 VST View Scope Mapping Table Direct access sequence 1194451 Command Result System action taken The scope m
56. Result System action taken The ILM I channel polling interval for the specified port is displayed System message display ILMI polling timeout is lt n gt sec Example Enter 1 1 8 4 3 3 1 2 The following message is displayed ILMI polling timeout is 30 sec Update ILMI Channel Polling Interval ILMI Setup 123 Update and save the ILM I channel polling interval for the specified port in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The minimum value of the polling interval is 30 seconds The default ILM polling value is 30 seconds Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 8 IME ILMI setup 4 POL Polling setup 4 STO Set Polling time out Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all ports Polling interval Range 30 1800 seconds Direct access sequence 118 4 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The polling interval for the specified port is updated and saved System message display ILMI polling timeout reconfigured Example Enter 1 1 8 4 4 3 1 2 30 The following message is displayed ILMI polling timeout reconfigured The polling timeout of port 3 1 2 is set to 30 seconds and is saved to flash 124 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES ATM Addresses Port Table Display User Management Entities UME ATM Addresses at Port ib You can configure the
57. S safety 421 electrostatic discharge information 34 features 31 precautions 33 scope mapping table displaying 393 managing 393 modifying 396 parameters 393 resetting to defaults 398 security check on LEC 323 security configuration restoring 327 saving 326 security list add LEC to 320 adding all joined LECs to 319 deleting all LECs from 318 deleting LEC from 322 displaying 316 segment ID configuring 262 server farms 29 set default node ID 349 set node administrative status to DOWN 338 set node administrative status to UP 337 set node ID 350 set node level 341 set peer group ID 347 456 INDEX setting clock synchronization 107 port network connection type 99 setup integrated 39 signaling general 31 signaling counters resetting 207 signaling protocol profile displaying 171 signaling protocol statistics displaying 205 signaling protocol version displaying 174 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 30 38 introduction 27 software files upgrading 91 SSCOP configuration parameters 185 standby suspend 87 startup delay updating 223 statistics 408 420 AAL5 control frame port 202 ATM layer 193 BUS 304 control frame port 202 204 gathering 30 LAN Emulation 304 LEC 306 LECS database 263 reporting 30 signaling protocol 205 traffic flow 189 viewing 189 storage humidity 421 subnet mask configuration displaying 62 summary address 407 table 414 switch management indicators 30 mode 87 type 87 switch security
58. See the Type parameter above for the full list of types Table 51 PTSE Table Parameters Node Topology Link Section Parameter Description Node The number of the node Node Id The node id in hex ATM Address MAC Address The ATM address of the node The MAC address of the node Showing PNNI Information 407 Table 51 PTSE Table Parameters Node Topology Link Section continued Parameter Description Local Port The number of the local port that connects to the remote port Remote Port The number of the remote port that connects to the local port Remote Node The node ID of the remote port Table 52 PTSE Table Parameters Node Address Section Parameter Description Address prefix The address of node within the peer group Length The number of significant bits of the ATM address that are used for route calculation Node The address of the node that originated the PTSE Table 53 PTSE Table Parameters Peer Group Neighbor Table Section Parameter Description Remote Node Id The node ID of the remote port State The operational status of the link between the two neighbor nodes The state may be Full Up Down Negotiating Exchanging Loading or Unknown Port Count The number of ports via which two neighbors connect Table 54 PTSE Table Parameters Summary Address Table Section Parameter Description SNMP Node Index The node index Internal Summaries The reachable address prefix for all nodes in a
59. Setup 1 GET Get LECS via ILMI ON OFF Status Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt Direct access sequence 1 1 8 3 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The LECS via ILM status for the specified port is displayed System message display LECS via ILMI is lt ENABLED DISABLED gt Example Enter 1 1 8 3 1 3 1 2 The following message is displayed LECS via ILMI is ENABLED Update LEC LECS Communication Channel ILMI Setup 119 Update the LECS via ILM parameter for the specified port in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch If this parameter is enabled the LEC communicates on the channel VPI VCI 0 16 with the ILM I MIB It submits an inquiry to obtain the LECS address If this parameter is disabled the LEC connects to the LECS using the well known address or via the preconfigured LECS address in the LEC Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 8 IME ILMI Setup 4 MIB ILMI MIB View Setup 2 SET Set LECS via ILMI ON OFF Status Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt LECS via ILM o to disable LECS via ILM enable disable 1 to enable LECS via ILM Direct access sequence 11 8 3 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The LECS via ILM status is upd
60. Signal Loss of Frame or AIS defect RDI was previously known as FERF RDI can also be identified as RDI L Line Remote Defect Indication RDI P STS Path Remote Defect Indication RDI V VT Path Remote Defect Indication 192 CHAPTER 8 VIEWING STATISTICS Reset Physical Layer Statistics Reset physical layer statistics for a specified port Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 4 STS Statistics 1 PHY Physical Layer 2 RST Reset phys layer counters Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or Enter 0 0 For all ports Direct access sequence 4 1 2 parameters Command Result System action taken Physical statistics for the switch are reset System message display Reset physical counters completed successfully Example Enter 4 1 2 1 1 1 The following message is displayed Reset physical counters completed successfully The physical statistics are reset for port 1 1 1 ATM Layer Statistics 193 ATM Layer Statistics Display Total Calls in Switch You can display the following ATM layer statistics m Display Total Calls in Switch Display Counters Per Port Display Counters Per VPI VCI Reset Counters Per Port Reset Counters Per VPI VCI For more information on ATM statistics see Traffic Statistics on page 117 in the Operations Guide Display the total number of calls existing in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Swit
61. Stand by SWM reset Example Enter 1 4 3 3 The following prompt is displayed Upgrade software files Are you sure Y N y The following messages are displayed The upgrading process will start shortly and take about 5 minutes The upgraded files will be active only after Stand by SWM reset 92 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Configuring Interface M odules Display Interface Module Information and Parameters You can configure parameters for the interface modules of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch m Display Interface M odule Information and Parameters m Set Port Frame Mode m Set Port Clock Mode m Set Loop Mode m Reset Interface Card Display the slot ID slot status and card type of each of the 11 interface modules or display parameters of an installed interface module You are prompted to specify an interface module for display Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 5 IFC Interface cards 1 GIF Get interface card info Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Slot ID 1 through 6 in the 7 slot chassis and 8 slot chassis and 1 through 7 10 12 14 and 16 in the 16 slot chassis for interface card information or 0 for general slot information Direct access sequence 1 5 1 parameters Command Result System action taken Interface Card parameters for a specific card or ATM Interface M odule parameters for a specific s
62. Supplier 443 Support from 3Com 443 Returning Products for Repair 445 GLOSSARY INDEX 3COM CORPORATION LIMITED WARRANTY ABOUT THIS GUIDE The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch User Management Guide provides all the information that you need to configure and set up the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch in ATM networking environments It also provides information about how the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch operates in an ATM network This guide is intended for the system administrator network equipment technician or network manager who is responsible for installing managing and operating a network that is based on the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch It assumes a working knowledge of network operations and familiarity with communications protocols that are used in networks No prior knowledge of 3Com s CoreBuilder networking equipment is necessary to understand the information in this manual If release notes are shipped with your product and the information there differs from the information in this guide follow the instructions in the release notes 16 ABOUT THIS GUIDE Conventions Table 1 and Table 2 list conventions that are used throughout this guide Table 1 Notice Icons Icon Notice Type Description instructions D gt Information note Information that describes important features or A N Caution Information that alerts you to potential loss of data or potential dam
63. The following prompt is displayed Set PNNI Scope Mapping Table to defaults y n Enter y or Y all other input keeps the old values Y The following message is displayed PNNI Scope Mapping Table is set to default values Press ENTER to continue Configuring the The following commands allow you to set up the route cache parameters Route Cache Get Cache State Set Cache State Get Cache Refresh for ADD PARTY Set Cache State for ADD PARTY Get Max Number of Routes per Cache Set M ax Number of Routes per Cache Get Cache State Display the current DTL cache state The DTL cache state may be ENABLED or DISABLED The default cache state is ENABLED Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI 6 SCR Set Route Cache UBR Configuration 1 GCS Get Cache Stat Enter menu sequence 1 1 9 4 Direct accesssequence 119461 Command Result System action taken The current DTL cache state is displayed System message display PNNI Cache for UBR is ENABLED DISABLED Press ENTER to continue Example Enter 119461 The following message is displayed PNNI Cache for UBR is ENABLED Press ENTER to continue 400 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Cache State Set the DTL cache state to ENABLED DISABLED The default cache state is ENABLED
64. The loss of signal defect is declared when no transitions are detected on the incoming signal before descrambling The LOS defect is detected upon observing 2 3 to 100 microseconds of no transitions The defect is cleared after a 125 microsecond interval one frame during which no LOS defect is detected Loss of frame A loss of frame defect is declared when an OOF SEF defect persists for a period of 3 milliseconds The LOF defect is terminated when the incoming signal remains continuously in frame for a period of 1 ms to 3 ms Loss of pointer A loss of pointer defect is declared when either a valid pointer is not detected in eight consecutive frames or when eight consecutive frames are detected with the New Data Flag NDF set to 1001 without a valid concatenation indicator A LOP defect is terminated when either a valid pointer with a normal NDF set to 0110 ora valid concatenation indicator is detected for three contiguous frames The AIS is an all ONES characteristic or adapted information signal It is generated to replace the normal traffic signal when it contains a defect condition in order to prevent consequential downstream failures being declared or alarms being raised AIS can also be identified as AIS L Line Alarm Indication Signal SP AIS STS Path Alarm Indication Signal VP AIS VT Path Alarm Indication Signal A signal returned to the transmitting Terminating Equipment upon detecting a Loss of
65. Values Set PTSE Holddown Timer Sets the PTSE holddown timer value The PTSE holddown timer value is the value expressed in milliseconds used by the specified node to limit the rate at which it can send PTSEs A change to the PTSE holddown timer value takes place after the next reboot For more information on PTSEs see PTSE on page 190 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration TIM Timers 1 PHD PTSE Holddown Timer 4 3 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range interval 1 30000 milliseconds Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The PTSE holddown timer values is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 1943415 The following message is displayed Default Value is 10 1 sec new value is 5 Press ENTER to continue 358 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Hello Holddown Timer Sets the Hello holddown timer value The Hello holddown timer value is the value expressed in milliseconds used by the specified node to limit the rate at which it sends Hello packets A change to the Hello holddown timer value takes place after the next reboot For more informa
66. a new LES configuration when updated invoked by the switch software automatically for example frame size change m Troubleshooting when there are problems with the connections of LECs to the LES Resets general LAN Emulation statistics for a specified ELAN to zero Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 5 RST LES Restart ELAN Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 Direct access sequence 2 2 5 parameters Command Result System action taken Specified ELAN is reset System message display ELAN is reset Example Enter 2 2 5 2 The following prompt appears Are you sure y n y Enter y to confirm n to cancel the reset request ELAN with ELAN ID 2 is reset 312 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION LEC ELAN ADMISSION SECURITY e e ecco This chapter describes LEC ELAN admission security in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch m LEC Not in ELAN Security List m LECsin ELAN Security List m Switch Security m Save Security Configuration For more information about LEC ELAN admission security see Chapter 8 LAN Emulation in the Operations Guide 314 CHAPTER 10 LEC ELAN ADMISSION SECURITY LEC Not in ELAN Security List Display LEC ELAN Join Privilege The following commands let y
67. by double underlined ID letter S in section title Back to beginning of setup To end of setup Integrated Fast Setup For step by step instructions see the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Switch Operation Fabric Module Getting Started Guide e e ecco USING THE LOCAL MANAGEMENT APPLICATION This chapter describes how to use the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Local Management Application LMA to configure and administer the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch A Menu Index shows the command structure of the LMA and refers to the command description for each menu command You run the LMA from a terminal via a direct RS 232 connection or via Telnet Management Capabilities Use the LMA to configure your CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch To augment network management you can use an external application such as 3Com s Transcend Enterprise VLAN M anager LM A functions include m Platform administration a LAN Emulation administration m ATM Connections administration m Statistics display m Testing amp Diagnostics administration Starting Up To log in to the LMA you need m The desired access level m Your password 42 CHAPTER 4 USING THE LOCAL MANAGEMENT APPLICATION LMA Access Level The LMA has three levels of access read access write access and administer access Each level grants different access privileges and is suited to a different type of user Table 8 lists the privileges granted for e
68. can also include the command parameters D System Action The action that the system takes after you enter the command 20 ABOUT THIS GUIDE Related Documents CoreBuilder 9000 Documents This section provides information about supporting documentation including mg CoreBuilder 9000 Documents m World Wide Web Site Documents m 3Com Facts Automated Fax Service Documents The following documents compose the CoreBuilder 9000 documentation set Documents are available in three forms m Paper Documents The paper documents that are shipped with your system are listed on the next page m CD ROM Additional documents are included in your CoreBuilder 9000 System Documentation CD ROM This CD ROM contains on line versions of the paper documents as well as additional documents not shipped with your system m World Wide Web and Fax Services Various types of documentation and information are available from the 3Com Web site and fax services To order a paper copy of a document that you see on the CD ROM or to order additional CDs contact your sales representative For a complete list of all CoreBuilder 9000 documents see the CoreBuilder 9000 Documentation Overview Related Documents 21 Paper Documents These documents are shipped with the CoreBuilder 9000 chassis m Chassis Quick Installation Guides Instructions for installing the 7 slot chassis 8 slot chassis and 16 slot chassis in a rack on a table or on a shelf incl
69. configuration to factory defaults Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Confirm reset yorn Direct access sequence 1 1 1 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The passwords are reset to their factory default values System message display Password configuration was set to defaults Example Enter 1 1 1 4 The following prompt is displayed Do you really want to reset config y n Enter y to confirm The following message appears Password configuration was set to defaults The passwords are reset to their factory values Setting Up forManagement 55 Setting Up for You can set up and display parameters for remotely managing the Management CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch needs these parameters to communicate via the network Display Current IP Configuration Update IP Address Display Current NMS IP Address Update NMS Address Display Current Default Gateway IP Address Update Default Gateway IP Address Display Current IP Subnet M ask Update IP Subnet M ask Display Current Read Community String Update Read Community String Display Current Write Community String Update Write Community String Display Ethernet Encapsulation Type Update Ethernet Encapsulation Type Set Management Configuration to Factory Defaults 56 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Display the current IP address of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise
70. copy will be provided to you UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND If you are a United States government agency then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to you subject to the following All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense Software is delivered as Commercial Computer Software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided in 3Com s standard commercial license for the Software Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252 227 7015 Nov 1995 or FAR 52 227 14 june 1987 whichever is applicable You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in or delivered to you in conjunction with this User Guide Unless otherwise indicated 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may not be registered in other countries 3Com the 3Com logo CoreBuilder NetBuilder Il Superstack and Transcend are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation ATM Link is a trademark of 3Com Corporation 3Com Facts is a service mark of 3Com Corporation All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated Guide written by Laura Novich Leah Hakim and Lynne Wolfson
71. delay is updated System message display mcst delay was set Example Enter 2 2 3 1 10 2 The following message appears mcst delay was set The LANE multicast forward delay time is updated 300 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION LEC Operations Display LEC Connection Info You can configure the LEC operations as follows m Display LEC Connection Info m Display LEC Address Info Display LAN emulation clients LEC connection information for a specified ELAN and specified LEC A LEC is specified by its ID To determine the ID of a specific LEC first perform this command with a value of 0 for LEC ID as in the example All LEC IDs are displayed Select the ID of the LEC for which you want information and perform the command again with the desired LEC ID Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 3 ELN ELANs Info 2 INF Clients Info Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 LEC ID o For all Direct access sequence 2 2 3 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The LEC connection information for the specified ELAN and LEC ID is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example LEC Connection Information Parameters Table 44 shows the LEC Connection Information parameters
72. global 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 Example Enter 1194451 The following information is displayed Index 1 OarANoa oa BFW NY ial UZ Lg 14 LS BGG PNNI Scope Table Name pnniScopeLocalNetwork pnniScopeLocalNetworkPlusOne pnniScopeLocalNetworkPlusTwo pnniScopeSiteMinusOne pnniScopelIntraSite pnniScopeSitePlusOne pnniScopeOrganizationMinusOne pnniScopelIntraOrganization pnniScopeOrganizationPlusOne pnniScopeCommunityMinusOne pnniScopeIntraCommunity pnniScopeCommunityPlusOne pnniScopeRegional pnniScopeInterRegional pnniScopeGlobal THANKED IC COME LAUS n 6 4 55 Pnni Level 96 96 96 80 80 72 72 64 64 64 48 48 32 32 0 396 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Modify Scope Mapping Table M odifies parameters in the scope mapping table A change to the scope mapping table parameters takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 4 ICF Interface Configuration 5 SMT Scope Mapping Table Configuration 2 MST Modify Scope Mapping Table Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Table index 1to 15 PNNI level 0 to 104 Direct access sequence 119445 2 Command Result System action taken The specified parameters are updated with the new values System message display PNNI Scope Mapping
73. i s Al amp Oy C I Be BE Be 5 BE 5 Be To To ND Gah C tony e J 4 gt PONE e w Er Org Ae 6 BS 0 NHNHNHNHNHNHDND o LS ods oll ods oS y LS male Og Woda wm q eq Ey 0 BAO BO BA Oey Ae IS Ty ISS TR ISS fe ISS Te TSS ISS TS I c bas poe ace ace a gt a gt a gt A y ep Gb tap AS Gh dour ap TS ep eG eG eg oS eet ae ISOY ea Noh a ISS Tay ae Ta TSS Tae ASS Te ASS I Jo ora Se ora bee boa poe ry Sy Wb E A C G9 her Gl eo te so BS Ba Bs oe Do Tal DSP TS IS te TS TS BRE IS Ne TS ss ss 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt Update Port Network Connection Type Setting the Port Network Connection Type 75 Update the network connection type EIISP UNI IISP or PNNI for a specified port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup NNI NNI Setup 3 4 SIF NNI Set Interface Typ Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number slot group port 0 0 for all ports NNI interface type o to set network connection type to EIISP 1 to set network connection type to UNI 2 to set network connection
74. in Hex Direct access sequence 1 1 5 2 5 parameters Command Result System action The LECS ATM address is updated System message display Active LI Example Enter 115 25 The latest saved LECS ATM address ECS addr lt address gt is displayed To change it use the backspace key and enter the new address Active LECS addr net prefix 47 00 00 00 00 00 3c 00 00 a Active LECS addr user part 00 a0 3e 00 00 01 00 Setting Up the Switch Clock Source 107 Setting Up the Switch Clock Source Get Clock Source Status Using this option you can set up all the parameters to configure and synchronize the data speed clocks on different ports of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch to an external clock source m Get Clock Source Status m Set External Clock Source 1 m Set External Clock Source 2 m Set Clock Source to Internal Display the active clock status and the current status of the ports defined as the active and standby clock ports The active clock source may be Internal or External If the active clock source is External one of the source ports must be active and the other source port may be None Standby or Failed not connected If the active clock source is Internal that is no source port has been defined as the active clock port the source ports are both set to None Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 8 SCS Switch Clock Synchronizat
75. menu names menu commands and software button names Examples From the Help menu select Contents Click OK 18 ABOUT THIS GUIDE Command In Chapters 5 through 11 of this guide all of the Local Management Description Application LM A commands are explained For each command a standard format describes the command Following is a sample of command descriptions Command Actions Enter the menu sequence SYS Platform configuration A SET Switch setup PAS Password setup REA Set Read access password Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range New password Up to eight alphanumeric characters New password again Enter the password exactly as you did before Direct access sequence 1 1 1 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The read access password is updated System message display The password has been changed Conventions 19 Table 3 explains the command descriptions Table 3 Command Description Sections Key Section Description A Menu sequence The menu options that you select to execute the command including all the levels and sublevels B Parameters The parameters to enter after the menu sequence and the format to use If no parameters are necessary this section does not appear in the command description C Direct Access The command sequence to enter at the prompt to Sequence run the command without going through all the sublevels The direct access sequence
76. next reboot Disable LAN Disable the LAN Emulation services in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Emulation Services Enterprise Switch The disable takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 5 SLE 7 setup LES LE Services setup 3 DLS Disable LE services Direct access sequence 1151 3 Command Result System action taken The LE services are disabled after the next reboot System message display LE service status will be DISABLED on he next reboot Ch Example Enter 1 151 3 The following message is displayed LE service status will be DISABLED on the next reboot 214 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Display LECS Status Display the status of the LECS in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The status is either enabled or disabled Command Actions Enter menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 1 1521 1 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 5 SLE Setup 2 LCS LECS setup Est T 1 STA Show LECS status 1521 The LECS status is displayed L D ECS service status is lt ISABLED gt The following message is displayed LECS service status is ENABLED ENABLE D Enable LECS Enable the LEC
77. node admin status to UP 1194322 337 13 Set node admin status to DOWN 119 4 3 2 3 338 13 Purge whole PNNI database 1194324 339 13 Get node level 11943311 340 13 Set node level 11943312 341 13 Get ATM address 11943321 342 13 Set default ATM address 11943322 343 13 Set ATM address 11943323 344 13 Get peer group ID 11943331 346 13 Set peer group ID 11943332 347 13 Get node ID 11943341 348 13 Set default node ID 11943342 349 13 Set node ID 11943343 350 13 Table 65 PNNI Commands Extended Version Only continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter Get node name 11943351 352 13 Set node name 11943352 353 13 Get PGL priority 11943361 354 13 Set PGL priority 11943362 355 13 Timers PTSE holddown timer 1194341 357 13 Hello holddown timer 1194342 358 13 Hello interval Th 943 ae 3 359 13 Hello inactivity factor 1194344 360 13 PTSE refresh interval 1194345 361 13 PTSE lifetime factor 119434 6 362 13 Retransmit interval 1194347 363 13 Peer delayed ACK interval 1194348 364 13 AvCR proportional multiplier 1194349 365 13 AvCR minimum threshold 11943 410 366 13 CDV proportional multiplier 119434411 367 13 CTD proportional multiplier 11943412 368 13 SVCC Initiation Time 119434 13 369 13 SVCC Retry Time 11943414 370 13 SVCC Calling Integrity Time Lig 3 42s 371 13 SVCC Called Integrity Time 11943 4 16 372 13 Set all
78. of header A 1 bit field in the ATM cell header that corresponds to the loss priority of a cell Lower priority CLP 1 cells can be discarded under a congestion situation The hardware housing unit for the CoreBuilder 9000 A high performance modular switching family which runs on an ATM or Ethernet backplane 446 GLOSSARY daughter card Early Packet Discard EPD EFCI E IISP Enterprise Engine EME Enterprise Network Flash Operational Software LED Framer IISP Interim Interswitch Protocol Local Management Application LMA loopback test LAN loopback test Can be either OC 3c OC 3c Single Mode Long Reach OC 12c Single Mode or Multi Mode or 155 Mbps over UTP5 These cards are attached to the ATM Interface Carrier Module to make the Interface Module complete A procedure for discarding cells related to one user frame to minimize the impact of congestion Explicit Forward Congestion Indication A 1 bit field in the PTI that contains information about whether congestion at an intermediate node has been experienced Extended Interim Interswitch Protocol A signaling protocol that uses network to network NNI based signaling for communication The management engine for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch A network structure that is similar to a campus network An LED that indicates in which software unit the error occurred An ATM Interface Module component that processes the SON
79. pe Le I Os SC PZE 0 172 Active Active Calling N po ioe Peat lise detec fae il ral eg PVs SVC PoP 0 190 Active Active Calling N Display Port Connections Example Display Info for a Connection at a Port Enter 3 3 11 1 1 3 200 The information for the connection 0 46 at port 1 1 1 is displayed 147 Connection number il Call number al BPO Connection type PVC BP2E Connection VPI B Connection VCI 200 Operational status Active Administration status Active Time of last change of operational state 655350 msec OCTAVO Calling CERE N Port SVC Connection Parameters Table 21 shows the port SVC connection parameters displayed by the command Table 21 Port SVC Connection Parameters Name Description Connection number Call number Port number M ember number Connection Type Connection VPI Connection VCI Operational Status Administration Status Number identifying the connection VPI VCI Number identifying the call Number identifying the port Sequential numbering of ATM addresses registered at a port Used to specify SVC The connection type specifies whether the connection is using SVC or PVC and if it is a point to point P2P or point to multipoint P2M call The Virtual Path Identifier VPI value defined for the specific port The Virtual Channel Identifier VCI value defined for the specific port Specifies the operational status of the co
80. presented according to the setting of the CLP bit If the call is P2M Point to M ultipoint the transmit or receive information is not always applicable Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 4 STS Statistics 2 ATM ATM layer 3 GVP Get counters per vpi vci Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt VPI Perform menu item 3 CON 2 RTG 1 CLL to get VCl the VPI VCI values for a call See Display Call Routed to ATM Address on page 140 for details Direct access sequence 4 2 3 parameters Command Result System action taken The total number of cells through a connection is displayed according to the setting of the CLP bit System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 4 2 3 1 1 13 200 The following message is displayed ATM Statistics per VPI VCI Ingress cells with clp0 set Ingress cells with clpl set l Egress cells with clp0 set Egress cells with clpl set 5 Reset Counters Per Port ATM Layer Statistics 197 Reset the statistics counter for total cells through a port For more information see Display Total Calls in Switch on page 193 Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 4 STS Statistics 2 ATM ATM layer 4 RPR Reset counters per port Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all port
81. route calculation Press ENTER to continue Configuring the Route Cache 403 Get Max Number of Displays the number of calls that can pass between a specific source and Routes per Cache any destination that has previously been accessed using the same route After this number of calls the cache will be refreshed Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 6 SCR Set Route Cache UBR Configuration 5 GMN Get Max Number of Routes per Cache Direct access sequence 119465 Command Result System action taken The number of calls that can pass between a specific source and any destination node using the same route is displayed System message display Num of calls to refresh the DTL cache is lt n gt Example Enter 119465 The following message is displayed Num of calls to refresh the DTL cache is 40 Press ENTER to continue 404 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Max Number of Routes per Cache Sets the number of calls that can pass between a specific source and any destination node that has previously been accessed using the same route After this number of calls the cache will be refreshed The default number of calls is 40 A change to the number of calls takes place immediately Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup
82. s alls alle alle alle pple gle galg galg S ga gig gig ails ails al aale aks t T x x Sh KO ASP OP POPS Cy SS 0 ey er ey eS ey Cy CS 4 OLS SSO OS LSS ey eo amp lt S ba o lt o Cy E T eo oe oe eo ea D De O O GOG GOG O C7 Sooo E BYP BY IBY SY SY MOY KOK KS ol 16k 16 ek E2 te Ke ED Sy ey Koy Tey Yor soy Koyo BE GQ SES FOS KS KS NOY MOY OP OE Sy Fea KS SY 1S 1S TS SIMO KS OS OG amp ee amp amp OOo On OL ON TO OOOO OO OO WO INS TSO TROY Te To ISS ISS IS UME Parameters Table 16 describes the UME parameters displayed by the command Table 16 UME Parameters Name Description Port ID ATM address Network prefix ATM address User part Member ID Manual entry ATM port id Network prefix of ATM address User part of ATM address The member ID is made up of the port ID concatenated with or followed by a sequential number It provides a sequential numbering of ATM addresses registered at a port It is used for Switched Virtual Connections only Always set to NO because it isa VME ATM address 128 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Display Static ATM Addresses at Port Display static ATM addresses registered for the specified port This command includes ATM addresses that have been entered manually via LMA or learned addresses over Network to Network I
83. successfully The clock operational mode of port 1 1 2 is set to loop timing 98 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Set Loop Mode Set the loop mode of selected port as None Loop Forward or Loop Back You are prompted to specify a port and a mode For details on loop mode see the IFC User Guide Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 5 IFC Interface Cards 5 SLM Set Loop Mode Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port Number slot group port 0 0 For all Loop Mode o for No loop 1 for Loop back 2 for Loop forward Direct access sequence 1 5 5 parameters Command Result System action taken The loop mode of the selected port on the interface module is set and saved System message display Setting loop mode has completed successfully CAUTION When setting the loop mode on one of the ports of an OC 3c or 155 Mbps over UTP5 card to Loop back all four ports are automatically updated even if only one port was selected Example Enter 1 5 5 1 1 2 1 The following messages are displayed The following settings will take place Changing port lt 1 1 1 gt setting from no loop mode to loopback mode Changing port lt 1 1 2 gt setting from no loop mode to loopback mode Changing port lt 1 1 3 gt setting from no loop mode to loopback mode Changing port lt 1 1 4 gt setting from no loop mode to loopback mode Do you really want to do these changes Y
84. take effect immediately after the status is reset to UP These include updating the ATM address updating the PNNI node id and updating the node level Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration CHR Characteristics 2 ADD ATM Address 3 SAD Set ATM Address Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ESI address XX XX XX XX XX XX where xx are two hex digits representing a single byte Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 3 2 3 parameters Command Result System action taken The ESI of the ATM address of the current node is displayed and updated to its new value System message display New ESI of PNNI Node ATM Address was set New ATM address is lt address gt Example Enter 1 1 9 4 3 3 2 3 00 CO DA 60 00 27 The following message is displayed New ESI of PNNI Node ATM Address was set New ATM address is 47 00 00 00 00 00 3C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 C0O DA 60 00 27 FF The address is updated to its new value The ESI of the ATM address displayed can also be changed by editing the existing address This is done by pressing the BackSpace left and or right arrow keys at the prompt and overwriting any of the last six bytes of the address The hex value FF in the example above is a selector byte number 20 It has local significance only is ignored by PNNI routing and cannot
85. taken The current signaling protocol version for each port is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 1 145 3 The following information is displayed Fe ie EY a eer CTV a S ace ne aS ele PEON thee S alls Ball ole ee ls he Slee xe il lll ce IE Si ul Su AS ramos S I i See KS IL als 20 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 pli 5 A a Sree Aa A S A MS Ge KS BA S De A 60 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 dln 4S Shou Sie S Saldi 26 Sia Aig ilS se Shes 36 Sh he Sh MS 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 sio ag o a Sie He we al elie Re ME lhe a A ae te Uh Si es Bertil 20 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 dlo Ae s Os kaS 2h Suil fe lt p Alls 3 Data Secs lt bss 60 4 0 4 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 dA s oala ar OG pal ass xe Ol lt lt ERA a OA SS OA 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 0 4 0 Signaling Setup 175 Protocol Version Parameters Table 24 shows the protocol version parameters displayed by the command Table 24 Protocol Version Parameters Name Description Port number Number of port on which the protocol version is being set Val The active protocol version 3 0 3 1 or 4 0 Flash The protocol version stored in the flash memory 3 0
86. the ATM Switch Fabric Module Installation Before you install the ATM Switch Fabric Module ensure that you have Prerequisites met all of the following prerequisite conditions 1 Complete the chassis unpacking and installation procedure as described in the Chassis Quick Installation Guides You can install the chassis in a rack on a shelf or on a tabletop 2 Install the power supply as described in the Power Supply Installation Guides and install the power cable as described in the Enterprise Management Engine Quick Start Guide for the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Switch 3 Install the Enterprise Management Engine as described in the Enterprise Management Engine Quick Start Guide for the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Switch 4 Install the ATM Switch Fabric M odule as described in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Switch Fabric Module Getting Started Guide 5 Read the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Interface M odule Getting Started Guide to make sure that you have all of the required components to get your system up and running and that you have completed all of the prerequisite work 6 To manage the ATM Interface Module and CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch through the Simple Network Management Protocol SNM P you must install the 3Com Transcend Enterprise M anager for UNIX or for Windows NT Installing the For complete details on how to install the daughter cards into the ATM Daughter Cards Interface Module see the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Interface
87. themselves are not displayed Enter the new read password mypassw Enter the new read password again mypassw The password has been changed The read access password is updated 52 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Update Write access Passw ord b gt Update the write access password Enter the new password a second time to confirm your entry To accept the default password press Enter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 1 PAS Password Setup 2 WRI Set Write access Password Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range New password 0 to 8 alphanumeric characters New password Enter the password exactly as you did before confirmation Direct access sequence 1 1 1 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The write access password is updated System message display The password has been changed Example Enter 1 11 2 The following dialog is displayed Note that the passwords themselves are not displayed Enter the new write password mypassw Enter the new write password again mypassw The password has been changed The write access password is updated Update Admin access Passw ord b gt Password Setup 53 Update the admin access password Enter the new password a second time to confirm your entry You are prompted for the existing password before you enter the new password To accept the def
88. three letter mnemonic identifier and a short description of the item There are two kinds of menu items commands that display another lower level command menu submenu and commands that perform a specific administrative task The submenu command is distinguished by the arrow gt on the right The Main Menu is at the top of the hierarchy Through it you access the submenus for the main topics of management such as Platform Configuration LAN Emulation and Connections Figure 3 shows the Main Menu and some of its successive submenus Figure 3 LMA Menu Structure CB9000 Switch Module Main Menu Sro Pilate Orm Conta guratvon LEM LAN Emulation gt 1 CON Connections gt SUING Stat ARS aves gt DIA Testing amp Diagnostics gt CB9000 Switch odul _ Platform Configuration Men SEME iSwaech ry Seeups 2 RES Set all Configurations Factory Defaults 3 LOA Download System Software gt 4 SWM Switch Modules Syne ee 5 6 FI CB9000 Switch odul Switch Setup MeD 7 RH 1 PAS Password Setup 2 MNG Management Setup gt GS eeN NIE INNIS St Ups 4 SIG Signaling Setup gt CONES LES Setup gt 6 SNP Switch Network Prefix Setup gt 7 FCI EFCI Threshold Setup gt 8 IME ILMI Setup gt Selecting Menu Options Example Changing a Password The LMA Menu System 45 To select a menu option
89. timers to the default values 11943418 373 13 436 APPENDIX B MENU INDEX Table 65 PNNI Commands Extended Version Only continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter Optimization Metrics Get optimization metrics 1194351 375 13 Optimization for CBR 11943521 3771 13 Optimization for RealTime VBR 11943522 378 13 Optimization for NonRealTime VBR 11943523 379 13 Optimization for ABR 1 94 3 5 27 4 380 13 Optimization for UBR 11943525 381 13 Set optimization for all classes to 11943526 382 13 default Interface Configuration Select port 119441 383 13 Interface Parameters Aggregation token 1194421 385 13 CBR admin weight 1194422 386 13 rt VBR admin weight 1194423 387 13 nrt VBR admin weight 1194424 388 13 ABR admin weight 1194425 389 13 UBR admin weight 1194426 390 13 Set to defaults 1194428 391 13 Set all int param to defaults 119443 392 13 Scope Mapping Table Configuration View scope mapping table 1194451 393 13 Modify scope mapping table 1194452 396 13 Table 65 PNNI Commands Extended Version Only continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter Set scope mapping table to defaults 1194453 398 13 Route Cache UBR Configuration Get cache state 119461 399 13 Set cache state 119462 400 13 Get cache state for ADD
90. to the high priority queue or low priority queue Default Low priority First CLP The setting of the cell loss priority at the input port First Port number The input port slot group port First VPI The input port VPI value for the call First VCI The input port VCI value for the call Second Port number The output port slot group port Second CLP The setting of the cell loss priority at the output port Second VPI The output port VPI value for the call Second VCI The output port VCI value for the call 156 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Create PVC Quick Setup Set up PVC using the default for parameters not explicitly set Default values for Cell Loss Level Priority and Cell Loss Priority are used See Table 23 The same limits as full PVC call setup apply For more information see Permanent Virtual Channels on page 87 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM Addresses 1 PVC PVCs Setup 3 CRP Create PVC call Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Call type P2P for point to point PVC P2mM for point to multipoint PVC First port number lt slot group port gt First port VPI See Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 for VPIMVCI limits First port VCI See Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 for VPIMVCI limits Second port number lt slot group port gt Second port VPI See Di
91. type to IISP 3 to set network connection type to PNNI Direct access sequence 1 1 3 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The network connection type for the specified port is updated System message display EISP UNI IISP PNNI type was set Example Enter 1 1 3 4 3 1 21 The following message is displayed This operation will release all SVC connections of the specified port s Are you sure Y N Enter y to confirm The following message is displayed UNI type was set The network connection type for port 3 1 2 is updated to UNI 76 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Reset NNI Configuration Reset the NNI configuration parameters for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch to their factory default settings The default setting is UNI for all ports and 7 for maximum number of hops Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 3 NNI NNI Setup 5 NNI Set NNI configuration to factory defaults Direct access sequence 11 3 5 Command Result System action taken The NNI configuration parameters are reset to their factory default values System message display NNI configuration was set to defaults Example Enter 1 1 3 5 The following prompt is displayed Do you really want to reset config y n Enter y to confirm The following message is displayed NNI configuration was set to defaults The NNI configuration paramete
92. value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 1943471 The following message is displayed Default Value is 5 new value is 1 Press ENTER to continue 364 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Peer Delayed ACK Interval Sets the peer delayed acknowledge interval The peer delayed acknowledge interval is the minimum time period expressed in milliseconds between transmissions of delayed PTSE acknowledgment packets A change to the peer delayed ACK interval value takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration TIM Timers 8 PDA Peer Delayed ACK Interval 4 3 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range interval 1 300 milliseconds Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 8 parameters Command Result System action taken The retransmit interval is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt New value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 19434815 The following message is displayed Default value is 10 new value is 15 Press ENTER to continue Set AVCR Proportional Multiplier Sets the AvCR Available Capacity for Minimum Cell Rate proportional multiplier percentage The AvCR proportional multiplier percentage is the proportional multiplier used in the al
93. 00 00 00 00 c0 da 34 55 0c 00 OK Y N Enter y to continue n to cancel 322 CHAPTER 10 LEC ELAN ADMISSION SECURITY Delete a LEC from the Security List Deletes a LEC or group of LECs from the security list for the specified ELAN for the current session Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 2 STB Security tables entries 6 DER Delete a security entry Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 See Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 Index of LEC l n See Display LECs in ELAN Security List on page 316 Continue prompt YOrN Direct access sequence 2 3 2 6 parameters Command Result System action taken The specified LEC is removed from the security table for the ELAN System message display Entry updated successfully Example Enter 2 32613 The LEC with index 3 in the security list for the ELAN with ID 1 is removed The following prompt is displayed Entry is 47 00 00 00 00 00 3c 00 00 a0 00 00 00 00 c0 da 34 55 0c 00 Delete Y N Enter y to continue n to cancel Perform a Security Check on a LEC Performs a security check on a LEC or group of LECs for the specified ELAN for the current session The candidate LEC is searched for in the security list of the ELAN If it is found its join privilege is displayed If it is not found then the ELA
94. 0004 ff Node 5 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c000004000000 00c0da000003 ff LocPort RemPort Remote node fi 414 Display Summary CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Displays the summary address table stored in the topology database Address Table Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 7 SHO Show PNNI information 4 SAT Summary Address Table Direct access sequence 119474 Command Result System action taken The summary address table stored in the database is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Summary Address Table Parameters For a full description of all the parameters displayed in the node information table see Table 54 PTSE Table Parameters Summary Address Table Section Example Enter 1 1 9474 The following information is displayed Level 72 gt Summary Address Table SNMP Node Index Internal Summaries Address ATOO OVO OU COS SOO OVO MOOO OOO Rir s mern t nest 104 No Advertise End of Summary Address Table Len Supp State Display Node Address Information Displays all ATM addresses that are used for route calculation of each node about which information is stored in the topology database Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI SHO Show PNNI information 5 AD
95. 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 1 VPS View PNNI E IISP State Enter menu sequence 1 Direct access sequence 11 101 Command Result System action taken The PNNI E IISP status and the next reboot value are displayed System message display PNNI E IISP State lt state gt Next reboot value lt state gt Example Enter 1 191 The following message is displayed PNNI E IISP State PNNI Next reboot value PNNI Configuring PNNI Nodes 331 Configuring PNNI Nodes The following commands allow you to configure the PNNI nodes of the network Get Number of Nodes Get Enhanced 164 Address Support State Set amp Save Enhanced E 164 Address Support State Get Node Index Get Node Administrative Status Set Node Administrative Status to UP Set Node Administrative Status to DOWN Get Node Level Set Node Level Get ATM Address Set Default ATM Address Set ATM Address Get Peer Group ID Set Peer Group ID Get Node ID Set Default Node ID Set Node ID Get Node Name Set Node Name Get PGL Priority Set PGL Priority 332 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Get Number of Nodes Displays the number of defined PNNI nodes in the switch Command Actions Enter menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 1 1 9411 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP C
96. 151 for VPIMVCI limits Output port VCI See Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 for VPIMVCI limits Output port CLP o for clear 1 for set Direct access sequence 3 4 1 4 parameters Command Result System action taken An additional PVC destination with parameters specified is created System message display A new output VC was created with call number lt n gt out connection number lt n gt 158 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Release PVC i gt Example Enter 3 4149 5 1 4 0 55 0 The following message is displayed A new output VC was created with call number 9 out connection number 25 Release a specified PVC PVCs must be manually released When a P2M PVC is released all additional destination connections are also released You cannot release SVCs with this menu In a P2M point to multi point call this option releases all of its branches that belong to the call number that you enter Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM Addresses 1 PVC PVCs Setup 5 REP Release PVC call Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Call number Integer See Display Call Routed to ATM Address on page 140 to get a call number for a port Direct access sequence 3 4 1 5 parameters Command Result System action taken The PVC with the specified call number is released System message display A PVC wi
97. 2 188 Hong Kong Upto 14 400 bps 852 25375601 Italy Up to 14 400 bps 39 2 27300680 Japan Up to 14 400 bps 813 5977 7977 M exico Up to 28 800 bps 52 5520 7835 P R of China Up to 14 400 bps 86 10 684 92351 Taiwan R O C Up to 14 400 bps 886 2 377 5840 U K Up to 28 800 bps 44 1442 438278 U S A Up to 53 333 bps 1847 262 6000 3Com Facts Automated Fax Service Access by Digital Modem ISDN users can dial in to the 3Com BBS using a digital modem for fast access up to 64 Kbps To access the 3Com BBS using ISDN call the following number 1 847 262 6000 The 3Com Facts automated fax service provides technical articles diagrams and troubleshooting instructions on 3Com products 24 hours a day 7 days a week Call 3Com Facts using your Touch Tone telephone 1 408 727 7021 Support from Your Netw ork Supplier If you require additional assistance contact your network supplier M any suppliers are authorized 3Com service partners who are qualified to provide a variety of services including network planning installation hardware maintenance application training and support services When you contact your network supplier for assistance have the following information ready m Product model name part number and serial number a A list of system hardware and software including revision levels m Diagnostic error messages m Details about recent configuration changes if applicable If you are unable to contact your network suppl
98. 25 38 installation prerequisites 38 ATM Switch Fabric Module Getting Started Guide 38 AToM MIB 31 auto configuration status displaying 114 updating 115 auto discovery status disabling 117 displaying 116 enabling 117 Available Bit Rate ABR 375 optimization parameter 380 setting administrative weight 389 AvCR minimum threshold percentage setting 366 AvCR proportional multiplier setting 365 B back pressure 30 backplane 30 bulletin board service 440 450 INDEX BUS statistics displaying 304 C cache maximum number of routes 403 refresh for ADD PARTY 401 402 setting maximum number of routes 404 call ID number 144 147 149 out connections 144 state 144 type 144 155 call admission control 28 call proceeding enable value displaying 177 calls in switch displaying 193 card type 27 CBR see Constant Bit Rate CDV proportional multiplier setting 367 cell delay variation CDV 367 transfer delay CTD 368 Cell Loss Level CLL 144 Cell Loss Priority CLP 144 bit setting support 28 Cell Loss Level CLL 144 introduction 30 channel polling interval 122 Chassis Quick Installation Guides 38 checksum PTSE 406 class of service 375 clock syncronization 107 clock source getting status 107 resetting 110 setting 108 109 communications protocols 31 configuration protocol 185 configuring PNNI nodes 331 connection ID number 147 149 type 147 149 VCI 147 149 VPI 147 149 co
99. 3 CON Connections 3 PRT ATM ports 3 ACT Not active addresses Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt VPI Enter a VPI value or A for all VPI values VCI Enter a VCI value ora for all VCI values Direct access sequence 3 3 3 parameters Command Result System action taken The connection information for the specified port is displayed Create Permanent Virtual Channel PVC 151 Create Permanent Virtual Channel PVC Display PVC VPI VCI Limits The following commands allow you to create a PVC Display PVC VPI VCI Limits Release PVC Display PVCs Create PVC Full Setup Create PVC Quick Setup Add PVC Destination Release PVC Destination Delete All Inactive PVCs Delete All PVC Connections of Port For more information about PVC see Permanent Virtual Channels on page 87 in the Operations Guide Displays the current and flash minimum and maximum VPI VCI values allowed for PVCs Command Actions Enter the menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM Addresses 1 Pvc PVCs Setup 1 GET Display VPI VCI Limits 3411 The VCI VPI limit information for PVCs is displayed 152 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Example Enter 3 411 The following information is displayed PVCs VPI VCI limits Rowe Aly a
100. 388 Set RtVBR Administrative Weight 389 Set NrtVBR Administrative Weight 390 Set ABR Administrative Weight 391 Set UBR Administrative Weight 392 Reset PNNI Interface Parameters to Default Values 393 Reset All PNNI Interface Parameters to Default Values 394 Managing the Scope Mapping Table 395 View Scope Mapping Table 395 Modify Scope Mapping Table 398 Set Scope Mapping Table to Defaults 400 Configuring the Route Cache 401 Get Cache State 401 Set Cache State 402 Get Cache Refresh for ADD PARTY 403 Set Cache State for ADD PARTY 404 Get Max Number of Routes per Cache 405 Set Max Number of Routes per Cache 406 Showing PNNI Information 407 Display All PTSEs in Database 407 Display PTSE Node Information 412 Display Topology Link Information 414 Display Summary Address Table 416 Display Node Address Information 417 A C Display PGL Election Information 419 Display Peer Group Neighbor Information 421 Display Statistics Information 422 ATM SWITCH FABRIC MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Physical 423 Environmental 423 Safety 423 Electromagnetic Compatibility 424 Standards Supported 424 CoreBuilder Management and Interface LEDs 424 CoreBuilder Management and Interface Connectors 424 MENU INDEX TECHNICAL SUPPORT Online Technical Services 441 World Wide Web Site 441 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 441 3Com FIP Site 442 3Com Bulletin Board Service 442 3Com Facts Automated Fax Service 443 Support from Your Network
101. 4 15 20 The following message is displayed Default Value is 35 new value is 20 Press ENTER to continue 372 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set SVCC Called Integrity Time Sets the SVCC called integrity time The SVCC called integrity time is the default value used to initialize the SVCC integrity timer at the node that accepts a switched virtual circuit at a logical group node originated by a neighbor node A change to the SVCC called integrity time takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 4 TIM Timers 16 SCD SVCC Called Integrity Time 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range integrity time 1 60000 seconds Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 16 parameters Command Result System action taken The SVCC called integrity time is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt New value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 19 4 3 4 16 30 The following message is displayed Default Value is 50 50 sec new value is 30 Press ENTER to continue Set All Timers to Their Default Values Resets all the timers in the timers menu to their default values Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SE
102. 44 LO 25 2 Rx 10 44 18 0 32 0 al of security 2 2 ASL 194605 194605 306 Display LEC Statistics CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Command Actions Enter menu sequence Display statistics for a LEC in a specified ELAN 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 3 ELN ELANs Information 4 STS Statistics 2 LEC LEC statistics Enter a parameter at the prompt Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Parameter ELAN ID LEC ID Example Enter 2 234220 Format or Range 1 16 For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 o Forall 2 2 3 4 2 parameters LEC statistics for the specified ELAN and LEC is displayed Information is displayed as shown in the example LEC statistics for all LECs of the ELAN with ELAN ID 2 are displayed as follows Tee New egi Num reg Num msg sent Num reject Num LE Num LE id MAC addr ATM addr by client join req arp fwrd arp resp 2 1 iL a 0 ik 0 il i AL 290 0 290 0 LEC Statistics Table 45 describes the LEC statistics parameters Table 45 LEC Statistics Name Description LEC ID Num Reg MAC addr Num Reg ATM addr Num msg Sent by Client Num Reject Join Req Num LE arp Fwrd Num LE arp Resp LEC ID number Number of MAC addresses registered by that LEC Number of ATM addresses
103. 47 selecting options 45 MIB II 31 MIBs 440 multicast send VCC 144 support 30 multi mode fiber 27 N NCDCHASS MIB 31 network connection type port 99 Network Network Interface NNI 71 general 31 network prefix displaying 137 network supplier support 441 networks ATM 29 NMS configuration displaying 58 NNI hops displaying maximum 164 updating maximum 165 node address 407 information 415 node administrative status set to DOWN 338 set to UP 337 node ID displaying 348 setting to default 349 updating 350 node index displaying 335 node information displaying 410 node level displaying 340 updating 341 node name displaying 352 updating 353 node topology link 406 412 nodes displaying number 332 nrt VBR non realtime Variable Bit Rate 375 optimization parameter 379 setting administrative weight 388 number of nodes displaying 332 number of out connections 144 o online technical services 439 operating humidity 421 operation overview 25 operational status 93 94 147 149 454 INDEX optimization resetting parameters to defaults 382 setting for ABR 380 setting for CBR 377 setting for non realtime VBR 379 setting for realtime VBR 378 setting for UBR 381 setting metrics 374 optimization metrics table displaying 375 parameters 375 originator of ATM port 148 149 out connection call 144 port ID 144 VCI 144 VPI 144 P paper documentation CoreBuilder 9000 21 parameters interface 383 384 passw ord a
104. 50 ACTIVE elan_8661_2 A Os0sO 0 0 36 050 20 50 0 0 0 e0ocle 60 411 cl5 2 ACTIVE BV Os 0s0 0 0 30 0500 00 0 0 C0 ca 60 13 1 2 elan_6159_2 BV O50 50 0 0 30 050 100 0 0 0 0 e0 ca 60 13 1 2 BW Os0 0 0 0 36 2050 20 50 0 0 0 e0 cl 60 711 cl5 2 ACTIVE elan_8661_5 V7 Os0sO 0 0 362 050 2050 0 0 0 e0ccle 60 71 cl5 5 ACTIVE A Os 0 0 0 36 050 c0 0 0 0 0 e0 cla 60 22 soa 2 ELAN LES Parameters Table 31 describes the ELAN LES parameters Table 31 ELAN LES Parameters Name Description ELAN Name Name of ELAN LES Address ATM address of ELAN LES Status Active status of LES Active or Backup 250 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Display ELAN Display the ELAN type and maximum frame size for a specified ELAN The Parameters in LECS information is taken from the LECS database Database Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS network topology 2 LEP Display ELAN type amp params Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 Direct access sequence 2 1 5 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The ELAN type and parameters are displayed as shown in Table 32 System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 2 1
105. 6 LESs that are defined in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Command Actions Enter menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Service 1 ADR LES BUS Address The LES BUS ATM addresses are displayed Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 2 2 1 The following information is displayed ELAN id ES BUS ATM address Network prefix HSSBUS ATM Useri parr address oy Gn OS IS IS tS ey Co A TE o Gal Ss GS i G DE PS SS is PS SS SS SS SS SS SSS SS iss SSS Sa aa sa Ss Ss Sy Sy Sy SS SS SROROZOROBORO ROR OR OOOO one Oy 4a N S LO te Ne Ney Ne Ney Kee on te oar 2 Xs Soo geoeeaqoaqeaqgqegqeaqeqgqeg ef 6 ey ys te te es 1S te oo to Loy oy oy Coy Toe SS O IE POSi SSE S satel 6 C s oie mC TSOR SOC mC SoCs mC aCe TSOR REISN SOLO FE 20 PE 2 gt FE 2o FE 2 gt FE gt PE Ao E e E E E E o a T ey ey ey Wey Hey ey Her ey ar ey ee Ko ey AE aa SG OG Co oe E eee ee 2S Y o oS yy OP om Mp HM om AE HM YH gM gM mM Spo OOO OOO OnOhOLOLO ce ep Kay te ep Kah Kap ay tap Kat oe 5 Vo No Woe yo SSS SS SSS SS SS SS SS GS OOOO OOOO OF E D E D EEA OO Oy IO EE E EE EE EI E E ONO E E EY cos aor sO SCOR SCOR SC
106. 87 Signaling QSAAL Timers IBGE Sonate Sys Tenths of second Param number Param name Current value 1 RONSON RO T 2 Keep alive UNI 3 0 10 B No response UNI 3 0 100 4 CEAUNI ES MO 10 5 1doRLIl OMNI Sy m 9 6 Keep alive UNI 3 1 O 7 No response UNI 3 1 70 8 COMUNE S rel 10 9 Idle UNI 3 1 ASSO 10 Sscop max CC 5 TEAN Sscop max PD 10 12 Sscop max stat 67 is Sscop window 16 188 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS e e ecco VIEWING STATISTICS This chapter contains detailed descriptions of common management tasks for viewing statistics of traffic flow in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch platform Physical Layer Statistics ATM Layer Statistics AAL5 Layer Statistics AAL5 Control Frame Port Statistics Signaling Protocol Statistics Physical Layer Statistics You can m Display Physical Layer Statistics m Reset Physical Layer Statistics For more information on physical statistics see Traffic Statistics on page 117 in the Operations Guide 190 Display Physical Layer Statistics CHAPTER 8 VIEWING STATISTICS Display the physical layer statistics for a specified port See Table 27 for an explanation of the different statist Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 4 1 STS PH 1 GI Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format o Port ID Direct access sequence 411 Example Enter 4 1 1 1 1 1 ics displayed Statist
107. 89 Set Standby Switch Fabric Module to Suspended In service Mode 90 Upgrade Software Files 91 Configuring Interface Modules 92 Display Interface Module Information and Parameters 92 Set Port Frame Mode 96 Set Port Clock Mode 97 Set Loop Mode 98 Reset Interface Card 99 Logging Out and Rebooting 100 Logout 100 Reboot 101 Configuration Flash Status 102 ATM Features and Software Versions 103 Display ATM Features 103 Display Software Versions 104 LECS ATM Address 105 Display LECS ATM Address 105 Update LECS ATM Address 106 Setting Up the Switch Clock Source 107 Get Clock Source Status 107 Set External Clock Source1 108 Set External Clock Source2 109 Set Clock Source to Internal 110 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES ILMI Setup 111 Display ILM I Version 112 Update ILM I Version 113 Display Auto configuration Status 114 Update Auto configuration Status 115 Display Auto discovery Status 116 Update Auto discovery status 117 Display LECS Access Options 118 Update LEC LECS Communication Channel 119 Display ILMI Channel Polling Status 120 Update ILMI Channel Polling Status 121 Display ILM I Channel Polling Interval 122 Update ILMI Channel Polling Interval 123 ATM Addresses Port Table 124 Display User M anagement Entities UM E ATM Addresses at Pot 124 Display Static ATM Addresses at Port 128 Display De registered ATM Addresses at Pot 130 Delete All ATM Addresses at Port 132 Add ATM Address to Port 133 Delete ATM Address by Member ID 134
108. 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 6 SCR Set Route Cache UBR Configuration 6 SMN Set Max Number of Routes per Cache Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Num of Calls 1 1000 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 6 6 parameters Command Result System action taken The number of calls that can pass between a specific source and any destination node using the same route is updated System message display Num of calls to refresh the DTL cache is lt n gt Example Enter 1 19 4 6 6 50 The following message is displayed Num of calls to refresh the DTL cache is 50 Press ENTER to continue Showing PNNI Information 405 Showing PNNI Information Display All PTSEs in Database The following commands allow you to display PTSE and other PNNI information m Display All PTSEs in Database Display PTSE Node Information Display Topology Link Information Display Summary Address Table Display Node Address Information Display Peer Group Neighbor Information Display Statistics Information Displays all types of PTSE messages stored in the topology database For more information on topology databases see Organizing a Network Hierarchy on page 183 in the Operations Guide Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI 7 SHO Show PNNI information 1 ALL All PTSEs in database Enter menu sequence
109. AN ID 1 16 For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 Direct access sequence 2 2 3 1 6 parameters Command Result System action taken The response policy for the specified ELAN is displayed System message display Response policy is Example Enter 2 23162 The LE_ARP policy of the ELAN with ELAN ID 2 is displayed as follows Response policy is FORWARD non reg LE ARP Policies for Route Descriptor Table 43 describes the LE_ARP policies for the route descriptor Table 43 LE ARP Policies for Route Descriptor Name Description Reject Request If the address is not found it rejects the LE_ARP request Forward Request Sends the LE_ARP request to all LECs in the ELAN 296 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Update LE_ARP Response Policy for Route Descriptor Update the additional policy for handling LE_ARP requests for a Token Ring ELAN Reject Request or Forward Request The new response policy goes into effect immediately This is a global setting for all the clients in that ELAN The factory default value is Forward Request See Table 43 for a description of LE_ARP route descriptor policies Command Actions LEM LAN Emulation LES LE Services ELN ELANs Information LSU LES Setup 7 SRD Set ARP Pol for non reg RD Enter menu sequence 2 pwe Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 For more i
110. AN Security List Delete All LECs from Security List Add All Joined LECs to Security List Add a LEC to Security List Change the Join Privilege of a LEC Delete a LEC from the Security List Perform a Security Check on a LEC Displays the LECs in the security list of the specified ELAN The join privilege accept or reject of each LEC or group of LECs is shown For more information about interpreting the display see Best Match Verification Admitting Individual LECs in a Group on page 146 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 2 STB Security tables entries 1 DIT Display elan security table Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter ELAN ID Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Format or Range 1 16 See Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 2 3 2 1 parameters The ELAN security list is displayed Information is displayed as shown in the example below Example Enter 2 3211 The ELAN security list is displayed for the ELAN with ID 1 The first line means that all LECs with the designated prefix are not allowed to join the ELAN The second line means that the LEC with the designated ATM address is allowed to join the ELAN Table for ELAN elan2684_0 Permission Address alee REJECT AD O 0 2 0 0 0 36 0 0 5a
111. ASS IL ILS Aly SS sell De sies KGL ae Current val Net Net Net Net Net Net Net Net Val for save et Net Net et et et et et Next reb Vieille Net Net Net Net Net Net Net Net Port number ey dbs AeA a heya oil eles Ree I ees FRI Pa eh DC A DA aes SSeS PAG Stee Slay PAH Current val ec Net Net et SE SIE et et Val for save et Net Net et et et et et Next reb val et Net Net et et et et et Port number cep hats eh eal ss seh il Weiss 2c Al iS egy SSS Sy OSS eh oh ahs a ex Current val ec Net Net et et et et et Val for save et Net Net et et et et et Next reb val et Net Net et et et et et Port number r alls KM yaa tothe il S cr ties AG esl oe lt Q has Alls Sie a A Current val ec Net Net SE en ey et et Val for save et Net Net et et et et et Next reb val et Net Net et et et et et Port number Zoa kaila iy ik OSs eis ih Sie eG SS Gy Oe Ss ela NOS Ge Se Wael Current val Usr Net Net SE SE et et et Val for save Usr Net Net et et et etr et Next reb val et Net Net et et et et et Update Signaling Protocol Profile Signaling Setup 173 Update the signaling protocol profile for the selected port See the previous section for details This command causes the new Signaling Protocol Parameters to be activated in the current session and the new value is stored in flash If a new value is not entered and stored in flash the ATM Enterprise Switch reverts to the previous value of
112. Addresses 1 UME Get UME Addresses at Port Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all ports Direct access sequence 3 1 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The UME addresses for the specified port or for all ports are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example 126 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Example Enter 3 1 1 0 0 The following information is displayed Note that port 1 of slots 1 and 2 have multiple ATM addresses registered ATM address Network prefix ATM address user_part member man TE cao ea o o Zone are E re E Sin E Se E Se Se E Re eT S DD De S e eS eS S ee e e o O sone ooroo SSNS WM WO G Cor Ge or EO Dr EO ED ES PRPRPrPrPrRPP PB PRPRPPRPrP PP OIA BRWBDN EP CPOROLOROLOROn b ten i h jh on tof Gy et we oO e Z Eas SN ONS a OS SR E a Ss Sa I a FS CIO 4D DE ln Sit Cole DP CAL SP ale BP Ch Si Lae Et H 5 o O K pae So ee oS amp amp 2 1 1S 4 HS 1S XO IO OIA as SAS as AE as OAE as SO OS SS EE e SOO E E E E oS oS E E 6s Co Co ico SFOS OOOO E EE ISS USS ISS ISS fe fe fs e Zz CROROR ORO ROR eRe Z b jy Gy Cy Coro Cc oS 5 G oO O 2 0 ise Peg ed Ee OROROROROROROmO melas oaks oaks 5 db oaks ales ale alts
113. Addressing on page 70 in the Operations Guide Display the Network Prefix of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Prefix Switch Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 6 SNP Switch Network Prefix Setup 1 GET Get Network Prefix Direct access sequence 11 6 1 Command Result System action taken The network prefix of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 1 1 6 1 The following information is displayed Current Switch Network Prefix T O OTO O O E O E OO Prefix The number of significant digits in the Switch Network IUO 138 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS This chapter describes how to configure ATM virtual channels Display Call Routing Display Port Connections Create Permanent Virtual Channel PVC NNI Hops Setup Signaling Setup Signaling Timers 140 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Display Call Routing Display Call Routed to ATM Address b gt You can display call routing to an ATM address For information about routing see Routing Internal Links on page 109 in the Operations Guide Display information for a call routed through a port to a specified ATM address registered at the port Use this command for example to get information about a call routed through a spe
114. CI Direct access sequence Format or Range P2P for point to point PVC P2M for point to multipoint PVC for no discard for 20 threshold for 50 threshold for 80 threshold for low priority for high priority for clear for set n for no change FO FO WNFO lt slot group port gt See Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 for VPIMVCI limits See Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 for VPIACI limits o for clear 1 for set n for no change lt slot group port gt See Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 for VPIMVCI limits See Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 for VPIMVCI limits 3 4 1 2 parameters Create Permanent Virtual Channel PVC 155 Command Result System action taken A full PVC with the required parameters is created System message display A new PVC was created with call number lt n gt Example Enter 3 4 1 2 p2p 000 5 1 2 1 55 15 1 4 0 60 The following message is displayed A new PVC was created with call number 11 Port Static Connection Parameters Table 23 shows the port static connection parameters that must be entered at the prompt Table 23 Full PVC Call Parameters Name Description Call Type Whether the call defined is point to point P2P or point to multipoint P2M No default Cell Loss level Threshold for cell based discard Priority Whether the call cells are transferred through the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch
115. Com nicht direkt in die Lichtquellen zu blicken Se PP Sicherheitsinfor Elektrostatische Entladungen ESD k nnen einzelne Baugruppen oder mationen fur das gesamte Modul besch digen ESD k nnen vorkommen wenn das Elektrostatische Modul nicht richtig gehandhabt wird und k nnen eine dauerhafte oder Entladungen zeitweilige Fehlfunktion bewirken t VORSICHT Zur Verh tung von Sch den durch ESD m Vergewissern Sie sich da Sie richtig geerdet sind Benutzen Sie ein Fu band und eine geerdete M atte oder tragen Sie ein geerdetes Handgelenkband mit gutem Hautkontakt mw Lassen Sie das Modul bis zur Installation in der Anti Statik Tasche Vorkehrungen beim Beachten Sie folgende Vorkehrungen beim Umgang mit dem Umgang mit dem ATM Schnittstellen M odul Modul m Fassen Sie das Modul immer nur an der Frontplatte an oder wie in dem ATM Switch Fabric Module Getting Started Guide gezeigt m Ber hren Sie nicht die Baugruppen Stifte Leitungen oder L tverbindungen m Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem Einschieben des M oduls da die beiden B gel zum Einschieben bzw Entfernen offen stehen m Achten Sie beim Einschieben des M oduls darauf da es sich in der oberen und unteren rechten und linken F hrungsschiene befindet m Achten Sie beim Einschieben des M oduls darauf da Sie es nicht verkannten Schieben Sie das M odule nicht mit Gewalt in das Ger t 38 CHAPTER 2 STARTING UP Installation This section describes installing
116. D Address PTSEs Enter menu sequence 1 1 9 4 7 Direct access sequence 119475 Command Result System action taken The address information for each node in the database is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Node Address PTSE Table Parameters For a full description of all the parameters displayed in the node address information table see Table 52 PTSE Table Parameters Node Address Section 416 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Example Enter 1 19475 The following information is displayed Address prefixes Address 47 00000000003c000000000000 47 00000000003c00000000eEeee 47 00000000003c000002000000 47 00000000003c000003000000 47 00000000003c000004000000 47 007900000000000000000000 00a03e000001 47 007900000000000000000000 00a03e000001 47 007900000000000000000000 00a03e000001 47 007900000000000000000000 00a03e000001 Length Node 104 48a0 47 104 48a0 47 104 48a0 47 104 48a0 47 104 48a0 47 00000000003c0000000 00000000003c0000000 00000000003c0000020 00000000003c0000030 00000000003c0000040 152 48a0 47 00000000003c00000 152 48a0 47 152 48a0 47 152 48a0 47 00000000003c00000 00000000003c00000 00000000003c00000 Display PGL Election Information Showing PNNI Information 417 Displays information on the peer group leader election The default peer group leadership priority is 0 and cannot b
117. DM Admin Status 2 SSU Set Node Admin Status to Enter menu sequence 1 1 UP Direct access sequence 1194322 Command Result System action taken The PNNI node administrative status is set to UP The change takes place immediately The number and administrative status of the PNNI node are displayed System message display Node lt m gt of lt n gt PNNI Node Administrative Status is set to UP Example Enter 1194322 The following message is displayed Node 1 of 1 PNNI Node Administrative Status is set to UP The PNNI node administrative status is set to UP 338 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Node Administrative Status to DOWN Updates the administrative status of the PNNI node to DOWN The change takes place immediately and is saved in flash memory for the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration ADM Admin Status 3 SSD Set Node Admin Status to DOWN 4 3 2 Direct access sequence 11 9 4 3 2 3 Command Result System action taken The PNNI node administrative status is set to DOWN The change takes place immediately The number and administrative status of the PNNI node are displayed System message display Node lt m gt of lt n gt PNNI Node Administrative Status is set to DOWN Example Enter 1 19 43 2 3 The foll
118. Display LE Service Redundancy Enable or Disable LE Servers Redundancy Update Startup Delay 218 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Display LECS Display the LECS order database in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Redundancy Switch The LECS order database has up to five entries The first entry is the active LECS and the others are redundant backup LECS which are activated according to order Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform config 1 SET Switch setup 5 SLES I setup LOL LECS ordered list 1 GLA Display LECSs ordered list Direct access sequence 115 31 Command Result System action taken The LECS order database is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 1 1 53 1 The following information is displayed Index LECS address 0 APO OMOO CORO ORO URS cOOn OO RAO OOROOMOOMOOR aOR Ss eROO MOOR O00 al ATO OPAOO OOO ORO ORS CR OORO Ob OM OUR OOO ORO OR aOR Se OOOO O00 Add LECS to LECS Order Database Add a LECS to the LECS order database in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch as the last element If you want to change the order of the LECS in the LECS order database delete the entries and reenter them You can add a LECS from any switch in which the LECS has been enabled Enter the ATM address of the LECS Command Actions SYS Platform config SET Switch setup SLE LE setup
119. Display the signaling protocol statistics for a specified port The number of signaling messages is presented according to transmitted and received messages Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 4 STS Statistics 5 SIG Signaling 1 GET Get signaling counters Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port Number lt slot group port gt Direct access sequence 4 5 1 parameters Command Result System action taken Signaling protocol statistics for the specified port are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example 206 CHAPTER 8 VIEWING STATISTICS Example Enter 4 5 11 1 1 The following information is displayed Call proceeding Connect Connect acknowledge Setup Release Releas hesitant Restart acknowledge Status Status inquiry Add party complet Add party acknowledge Add party reject Drop party Drop party acknowledge Number of messages transmitted Sea Gg ee ofa 2 Se 2S Total connections established so far Number of currently active connections Number of messages received OOogooaeoo qo loo eof sS Reset Signaling Counters Resets the signaling counters for a specified port Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 4 STS Statistics 5 SIG Signaling 2 RST Reset signaling counters Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group
120. ECS address Direct access sequence 2 1 1 Command Result System action taken The address of the resident LECS is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 2 11 The following information is displayed The first 13 bytes represent the network prefix of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch and the last 7 bytes represent the user part LECS ADDR is AP AO O50 00 SSO GW SOO HO Oe Wha Well vox Ole eal 510 Update Resident LECS Address LECS Address 245 3 Update the address of the resident LECS Enter the user part of the address last 7 hex bytes The switch network prefix is used for the first 13 bytes The update takes place immediately Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Config Service 2 LSP Set resident LECS addr Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range User part of LECS 7 Hex bytes separated with dots address Direct access sequence 2 1 2 parameter Command Result System action taken The address of the resident LECS is updated The update takes place immediately System message display FLASH action completed successfully Example Enter 2 1 2 0 a0 3e 0 0 1 0 The following message is displayed FLASH action completed successfully The resident LECS address is updated 246 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION LECS Search Policy
121. EEE 802 3 m Management Protocols RFC 1157 SNMP RFC 1212 Concise RFC 1213 MIB II RFC 1212 Traps 32 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW STARTING UP This chapter contains a description of the system states of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Switch Fabric Module and its daughter cards Topics covered in this chapter include Safety Precautions Handling Precautions Pr cautions de S curit Pr cautions de Manipulation Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Vorkehrungen beim Umgang mit dem M odul Installation For information about installing the ATM Switch Fabric M odule see the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Switch Fabric M odule Getting Started Guide Safety Precautions A When you handle components in a CoreBuilder 9000 system be sure that you follow all safety precautions To avoid electric shocks burns fire or equipment damage read and follow these warnings WARNING Hazardous energy exists within the CoreBuilder 9000 system Use extreme caution when you install remove or replace the ATM Switch Fabric M odule WARNING The ATM Switch Fabric M odule must be installed removed or replaced only by trained service personnel 34 CHAPTER 2 STARTING UP A AN Laser and LED Safety Information A ESD Safety Information AN WARNING When the CoreBuilder 9000 system is on never insert metal objects such as a screwdriver into open module slots and be sure to remove all hand worn jewelry such as watches and rings When the system
122. ELAN on page 259 ATM Address 20 Hex bytes separated by dots Direct access sequence 2 1 5 5 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The ATM address inserted for the selected ELAN is deleted System message display ATM address was deleted for this elan Example Enter 2 155 2 elan_73_947 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The following message is displayed Mac address was deleted for this elan The specified ATM address is deleted from the ELAN 258 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Add ELAN ATM Address Add an ELAN ATM adaress for a specified ELAN ATM address database This database is disconnected from the real database Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 5 ATM ATM Address Info 3 ADD Add new ATM address Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 ATM Address 20 Hex bytes separated by dots Direct access sequence 2 15 5 3 parameters Command Result System action taken The ATM address for the selected ELAN is added to the debug mode ATM address database System message display ATM address was added to this elan Example Enter 2 15 5 3 elan_73_9 47 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The system responds with the confirmation ATM address was added to this
123. ELAN Parameters in LES Database You can configure the ELAN parameters as follows m Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database m Update ELAN Parameters in LES Database Display general information about the 16 ELANs in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The information is taken from the LES database For more information about parameters in the LECS database see Display ELAN Parameters in LECS Database on page 250 Command Actions Enter menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display 2 LEM LAN Emulation S LE Service 2 GEN ELANs General Info The ELAN information specified in Table 39 is displayed Information is displayed as shown in the example 284 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Example Enter 2 2 2 The following information is displayed ELAN ELAN ELAN Max Comierome Mcast id name type frame distrib forward size mem_id mem_id Cal arel CRNA il Gleam 690 802 353 sie L7OL Wi LOL 1s 2 elean GV i S0275 Isis No Val o Val 3 elam B9 2A 802 35 IELE No Val o Val 4 elan_69_3 802 5 4544 TO 5 1704 7 5 elan 69 4 6802 3 151 No Val o Val 6 elana 69 5 02r 151 No Val o Val 7 elan_69_6 802 3 1516 No Val No Val 8 ekaia 697 802 3 1516 No Val No Val slam 69 8 802238 L516 No Val No Val LO slam GS 9 80228 L516 No Val No Val Li elam 69 10 30273 Isle No Val No Val 12 eklam
124. ET SDH frames extracts the ATM cells from the incoming serial data verifies cell header validity and transfers cells to the ATM Layer Processor A signaling protocol that uses user to network UNI based signaling for switch to switch communication The graphic interface used to manage the Enterprise Switch locally A test used to diagnose faulty cables as well as faults in the framer or other components of a daughter card Local Area Network A data communications network spanning a limited geographical area such as a single building or campus It provides communication between computers and peripherals LANs are distinguished by their small geographical size high data rate and low error rate The loopback test is used to diagnose faulty cables as well as faults in the framer or other components of a daughter card Module Status LED multiplexing Network to Network Interface NNI Partial Packet Drop PPD peer group peer group leader physical link PNNI Routing Control Channel PNNI Port Status LED Serial Link Software State Indicator LED Software Error LED traffic management User Network Interface UNI An LED that indicates the system state of the ATM Interface Module A function within a layer that interleaves the information from multiple connections into one connection ITU T specified standard interface between nodes typically ATM switches within the same network The network uses E IISP a
125. GS 11 802 3 ISl No Val No Val La stan G9 12 802 3 LSLS No Val No Val 14 elan 69 13 602 3 T516 No Val No Val 15 eilan G9 14 802 3 LSLE No Val No Val ELAN Parameters for Resident LESs Table 39 describes the ELAN parameters for resident LESs Table 39 ELAN Parameters for Resident LESs Name Description ELAN ID ELAN ID number ELAN Names ELAN name ELAN Type The type of frames that the ELAN recognizes m 802 3 Ethernet type m 802 5 Token Ring type Max Frame Size LAN Type Frame Length Bytes Ethernet Fast Ethernet 1516 Token Ring 1516 4544 FDDI 4544 Control Specifies the point to multipoint connection id between the ELAN s BUS and the LECs and the BUS member id If no LECs are connected no val is displayed Mcast Specifies the point to multipoint connection between the ELAN s BUS and the LECs and the BUS member id If no LECs are connected no val is displayed not typical ELAN 4 is of Token Ring type 286 Update ELAN Parameters in LES Database A gt CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Update the parameters for the specified ELAN in the LES database Table 40 describes the ELAN parameters you can update CAUTION After you use this command to update the parameters of an ELAN in the LES database you must use the LMA to update the parameters of the ELAN in the LECS database in exactly the same way For more information see Update ELAN Parameters in LECS Database on
126. HASS MIB private m ATM Forum Standards Compliance m Electromagnetic Compatibility FCC Part 15 EN50081 1 EN55022 Class B EN50082 1 IEC 801 2 IEC 801 3 IEC 801 4 m Safety EN60950 UL1950 CSA22 2 TUV IEEE 825 1 852 2 PCB UL94V O PCB ANSI IEEE RB 276 Class 2 Standards and Protocols Supported ATM Protocols This section describes the major standards and protocols used within the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch and the network applications and topologies that you can use The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch uses ATM technology including connection protocols user to network and network to network interfaces You can directly control all features via device management For more information about ATM see Chapter 3 ATM Network Basics in the Operations Guide The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch uses numerous protocols to connect to and communicate with other devices in the network Among the protocols used is the Integrated Local Management Interface ILM I which is used to connect over the user to network interface UNI and netw ork to network interface NNI as well as for address registration Signalling Q2931 for Switched Virtual Connection SVC is used for dynamically managing calls IISP E IISP are implemented for multiple switch networks m Communications Protocols RFC 826 ARP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RDC 768 UDP RFC 793 TCP m Ethernet Protocols IEEE 802 1d I
127. Hungary 00800 12813 Ireland 1800553117 Israel 1800 9453794 Italy 1678 79489 Netherlands 0800 0227788 Norway 800 11376 Poland 00800 3111206 Portugal 0800 831416 South Africa 0800 995014 Spain 900 983125 Sweden 020 795482 Switzerland 0800 55 3072 U K 0800 966197 U S A and Canada 1 800 NET 3Com 1 800 638 3266 Enterprise Customers 1 800 876 3266 1 408 326 7120 not toll free 444 APPENDIX C TECHNICAL SUPPORT ASIC ATM ATM Interface Module ATM Layer Processor backplane cell Cell Loss Priority CLP chassis CoreBuilder 9000 GLOSSARY Application Specific Integrated Circuit a chip designed for a particular application ASICs are built by connecting existing circuit building blocks in new ways Because the building blocks already exist in a library it is much easier to produce a new ASIC than to design a new chip from scratch Asynchronous Transfer Mode A transfer method used for LAN and WAN ATM carries voice video and data at speeds up to 2 2 Gbps and can integrate geographically distant disparate networks Also called cell relay An ATM Interface Carrier Module with one or two daughter cards The ATM Layer Processor prepares cell header information and manages temporary cell storage The main bus that carries data within a device An ATM Layer protocol data unit PDU characterized by fixed rather than variable length payloads The standard ATM cell is 48 bytes of payload with 5 bytes
128. ILMI Version Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt IM LI version o to update to version 3 0 1 to update to version 3 1 2 to update to version 4 0 Direct access sequence 1 1 8 1 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The ILM I Version is updated for the selected port System message display ILMI version is reconfigured Example Enter 1 1 8 1 2 3 1 2 1 The following message is displayed ILMI version is reconfigured The ILM I version of port 3 1 2 is updated to 3 1 114 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Display Auto configuration Status Display the auto configuration status for the specified port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Auto configuration determines by negotiation the User Network Interface UNI parameters for the specified port The configuration options are enabled auto configured or disabled not auto configured For more information about auto configuration see Auto Configuration on page 62 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup IME ILMI Setup AUC Auto Configuration Setup 1 GET Get Auto Configuration ON OFF Status 1 8 2 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt Direct access sequence 1 1 8 2 1 parameters Command Result Sys
129. L CHANNELS NNI Hops Setup Display Maximum NNI Hops The following commands allow you to configure the NNI hops parameter m Display Maximum NNI Hops m Update Maximum NNI Hops For more information about hops see Hop Limit Avoiding loops on page 111 in the Operations Guide Display the maximum number of hops permissible for NNI routing This parameter limits the number of times a setup message can be transferred between switches on NNI connections in search of a destination thereby avoiding an infinite loop Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 3 NNI NNI setup 1 GMD NNI Get maximum number of hops Direct access sequence 11 3 1 Command Result System action taken The maximum number of hops permissible for NNI routing is displayed System message display NNI max hops lt n gt Example Enter 1 1 3 1 The following message is displayed NNI max hops 7 D The actual number of hops is max_hops 1 Update Maximum NNI Hops NNI Hops Setup 165 Enter the new Maximum NNI Hops parameter to update the Maximum NNI Hops parameter of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The choice of parameter value depends on the size and topology of the network For a hierarchically designed network it is normally chosen to be 7 For more information see Hop Limit Avoiding loops on page 111 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Ente
130. LAN EMULATION Set Default Holding Time Sets the M PS p7 default holding time parameter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 1 MPS MPOA Server Configuration 8 MP7 Set default holding time Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range default holding time 1 120 minutes Direct access sequence 2 5 1 8 Command Result System action taken The default holding time parameter is set System message display Parameter changed successfully Example Enter 2 5 1 8 60 The following message is displayed Parameter changed successfully Display Current MPC Displays all the current settings of the MPC variables Configuration Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 2 MPC MPOA Client Configuration 1 DIS Display current config Direct access sequence 2 5 21 Command Result System action taken All the current settings of the MPC variables are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example below Example Enter 2 521 The following information is displayed POA Client Configuration 2 ol shortcut setup frame count 10 a number RCEP shortcut setup frame time 1 seconds 21C 03 flow detection protocols Ie PC p4 MPC initial retry time 5 seconds BCS MPC retry time maximum 40 seconds RCD hold d
131. LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 9 RDN LE Service redundancy 3 FEP Force Elan to Primary Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 Direct access sequence 2 1 5 9 3 parameter Command Result System action taken The primary LES of the specified ELAN becomes the active LES System message display Force to Primary message sent to LECS 272 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Example Enter 2 1 5 9 3 elan_73_9 The following message is displayed Force to Primary message sent to LECS The active LES of the specified ELAN is forced to become the primary LES Display Redundant Display general information about redundant ELANSs ELANs General Information Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 9 RDN LE Service redundancy 4 REG Display Redundant ELANs general info Direct access sequence 215 9 4 Command Result System action taken The general Redundant ELANs information is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 21594 The following information is displayed Id NAME STATE LES Id amp State PRM LES Id amp State SCN O elanl PRIMARY 0 ESTABLISH
132. LLOWED BY LAW 3COM ALSO EXCLUDES FOR ITSELF AND ITS SUPPLIERS ANY LIABILITY WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE FOR INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR FOR LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE USE PERFORMANCE FAILURE OR INTERRUPTION OF ITS PRODUCTS EVEN IF 3COM ORITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND LIMITS ITS LIABILITY TO REPAIR REPLACEM ENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID AT 3COM S OPTION THIS DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES WILL NOT BE AFFECTED IF ANY REMEDY PROVIDED HEREIN SHALL FAIL OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE DISCLAIMER Some countries states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or the limitation of incidental or consequential damages for certain products supplied to consumers or the limitation of liability for personal injury so the above limitations and exclusions may be limited in their application to you When the implied warranties are not allowed to be excluded in their entirety they will be limited to the duration of the applicable written warranty This warranty gives you specific legal rights which may vary depending on local law GOVERNING LAW This Limited Warranty shall be governed by the laws of the State of California U S A
133. M addresses at port 3424 135 6 Delete all inactive addresses 3425 136 6 Statistics Get physical layer counters 411 190 7 Reset phys layer counters 412 192 1 Get SVC PVC total calls 421 193 1 Get counters per port 422 195 7 Get counters per VPI VCI 423 196 7 Reset counters per port 424 197 7 Reset counters per VPI VCI 425 198 7 Table 64 M enu Index continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter AAL5 Layer Get AAL amp SAR counters 4 3 4 199 1 Reset AAL amp SAR counters 432 201 7 Control Frames Get control frames counters 441 202 7 Reset control frames counters 442 204 1 Get signaling counters 451 205 7 Reset signaling counters 45 2 207 7 General Operations Display ATM features 6 103 Logout 7 100 Version 8 104 Fast setup 9 Debug 10 See the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Switch Fabric Module Getting Started Guide 434 APPENDIX B M ENU INDEX Table 65 PNNI Commands Extended Version Only Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter PNNI Commands View PNNI EIISP state 1191 330 13 Node Configuration Get number of nodes 119411 332 13 Get enh E 164 address support state 119421 333 13 Set amp save enhanced E 164 addr 119422 334 13 support state Node Characteristics Get node index 1194311 335 13 Get node admin status 1194321 336 13 Set
134. MS address was successfully set for the next reboot Example Enter 1 1 2 2 2 100 1 0 131 The following message is displayed NMS address was successfully set for the next reboot The NMS address is updated to 100 1 0 131 60 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Display Current Default Gatew ay IP Address Display the current Default Gateway IP address The Default Gateway is used to locate the network management station NMS if the NMS is not found in the local IP subnetwork Command Actions Enter the menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 1 1231 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup MNG Management setup GWY Default Gateway Setup 2 3 1 GGW Get Default Gateway 3 11231 The current default gateway IP address is displayed Current Default Gateway address The following message is displayed Current Default Gateway address 151 104 78 20 The current default gatew ay IP address is displayed Setting Up for Management 61 Update Default Update the Default Gateway address The default factory Default Gateway IP Address Gateway IP address is 151 104 78 20 i gt The default gateway IP address is changed after the next reboot Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup MNG Management Setup GWY Default Gateway Setup 2 SG
135. Messages Displayed 1 SYS Platform Configuration 3 LOA Load System Software 1 STS Display TFTP Download Status 131 Last TFTP software download status is displayed See Table 11 Table 11 describes the download system messages displayed by the command 80 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Table 11 Download Messages Message Meaning and Action System is loading from ip address file Received n Completed successfully Unknown Error while downloading o response from server Checksum error Image is incompatible with the device Image file not found System Loader cannot reach the server Flash memory partially erased Example Enter 1 3 1 System is loading Download has completed No activity nothing downloaded CRC error download again If the error persists contact 3Com technical support Bad connection m Check cable connection m Check if TFTP server is up m Check TFTP server IP address Download again The downloaded file properties for example name do not match the internal CoreBuilder list of properties Check if the file exists in the path Check the following m Cable connection m f TFTP server is up m TFTP server IP address After downloading Switch Fabric Module software Download software again via RS 232 port After downloading ATM Interface Module software Download software again via TFTP The most recent TFTP software download status is displa
136. N y Setting port loop mode command has completed successfully The loop mode of port 1 1 2 is set to Loop back Configuring Interface Modules 99 Reset Interface Card Reset the interface module in a specific slot or all the interface module Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 5 IFC Interface Cards 6 RST Reset Interface Card Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Slot Number 1 16 or 0 for all Direct access sequence 1 5 6 parameters Command Result System action taken The selected interface module is reset System message display The interface card was reset Example Enter 1 5 6 0 The following prompt is displayed Do you really want to reset all the interface cards Y N Enter y to confirm The following message is displayed All the interface cards were reset 100 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Logging Out and Rebooting Logout You can log out and reboot the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch m Logout m Reboot m Configuration Flash Status Log out of the current session Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 7 LOG Logout Direct access sequence 7 Command Result System action taken Logs out the system Example Enter 7 The system is logged out Logging Out and Rebooting 101 Reboot Reboot the system Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 7 RBO Reboot En
137. N EMULATION Display LE_ARP Response Policy for Route Descriptor Display the additional policy for handling LE_ARP requests for a specified ELAN when the LAN destination is a route descriptor Token Ring ELAN This policy is used in conjunction with the LE_ARP response policy For more information see Display LE_ARP Response Policy on page 291 The policy is applicable only when the Respond option is selected in that policy See Table 43 When the Respond policy is selected the address table of the LES in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch is searched for the LAN destination If the LAN destination is not found and is a Route Descriptor this policy gives the you the option of rejecting the LE_ARP request You can select between the options m Reject the LE ARP request m Forward the LE ARP request to all LECs in accordance with the LE_ARP response policy All route descriptors are required by the LANE specification to be registered at the LES No proxy LECs are allowed for route descriptors This command essentially handles those cases for which the LAN destination exists but was not registered at the LES in contradiction to the LANE specification Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 3 ELN ELANs Information LSU LES Setup 6 GRD Get ARP pol for non reg RD Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range EL
138. N default behavior is displayed Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 2 STB Security tables entries 7 CHK Perform a security check Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 l See Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 ATM address or network ATM address prefix of LEC Direct access sequence 2 3 2 7 parameters Command Result System action taken The specified LEC is checked in the security table for the ELAN System message display Example Enter 2 3271 47 00 00 00 00 00 3c 00 00 a0 00 00 00 00 c0 da 34 55 0c 00 The LEC with the specified ATM address is checked in the security list for the ELAN with ID 1 324 CHAPTER 10 LEC ELAN ADMISSION SECURITY Switch Security The following commands allow you to enable or disable the LEC admission security for the entire switch For more information see LANE Security on page 145 in the Operations Guide m Display Switch Security Status mw Enable Disable Switch Security Display Switch Displays the LEC admission security status for the switch Security Status Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 3 SWS Switch security 1 GST Get switch security state Direct access sequence 2 3 3 1 Command Result System action taken The LEC admiss
139. NFIGURING THE PLATFORM Reset All Except IP Addresses b gt Reset configuration parameters for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch to their factory default settings with the exception of the IP parameters Some parameters are reset only after the next reboot These parameters include ATM addresses PVC and NMS parameters Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 2 FLS Flash setup 2 RES Reset All Except IP Addresses to Defaults Direct access sequence 1 2 2 Command Result System action taken All configuration parameters except IP are reset to their factory default values System message display Reset of all saved configuration except IP was done Example Enter 1 2 The following message is displayed Reset of all saved configuration except IP was done All configuration parameters are reset to their factory values Downloading System Software 79 Downloading System Softw are Display Softw are Download Status You can download the system software for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch m Display Software Download Status Upload Configuration Download Switch LANE PNNI Configuration Download System Software by TFTP Download System Software by Serial Port Display the last TFTP software download status Command Actions Enter the menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display
140. NI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value intraSite The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value sitePlusOne The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value organizationM inusOne The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value intraOrganization The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value organizationPlusOne The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value communityM inusOne The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value intraCommunity The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value communityPlusOne The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value regional The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value interRegional The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value
141. OR ste SCOR 5 CO s SCO 5 COs SCO 5 COs SCO SCOR 50s da da da da da da da da da da da da da da da da 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 O O ee O GOG OGO oe eye oy ey oy Xo oy Se Seq Qe oqooaqgo oa ao 2 2 2 2 20 MS MSS TSS SS SS TSS SS RSS ISS SS PE SSS SSS OMOWMOWMOMOMOMOWMO WO WOO OO WO YO Oo iIny h CF tor M ke Ce sy oy Gi Ss Oo Wf S amp S 282 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Update ELAN LES BUS Address Update the LES address of the specified ELAN Enter the LES address user part which consists of 6 bytes separated by dots The last byte is a selector byte 0 F that signifies the sequential identifier of the LES in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 3 ELN ELANs Info 1 LSU LES Setup 1 ADR Set amp save LES BUS address Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID The ELAN ID number 1 16 ATM Address 6 bytes of user part separated with dots Direct access sequence 2 2 3 1 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The LES BUS ATM addresses for the specified ELAN are updated The update takes place immediately Example Enter 2 2 3 1 1 2 cO0 da 60 0 49 0 The LES BUS ATM addresses for the ELAN with ELAN ID 2 are updated ELAN Parameters Display
142. PS cola 480 I eLo aS 360 ey CREI ie S27 3 OPE IS OBES S 16 TORR GOS PEt SON 36 DE CP 1 Sh0 8 40 TARGO SPETT 360 Display QSAAL Signaling Timers and Protocol Configuration Signaling Timers 185 Display the current QSAAL signaling protocol timer values and Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol SSCOP configuration parameters for the specified port The timer values are displayed in tenths of a second You can update the timer values by changing the timer resolution For more information see Update Protocol Timer Resolution on page 182 The configuration parameters can be altered Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 4 SIG Signaling Setup 4 QSA Get Signaling QSAAL Configuration setup Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt Direct access sequence 1 1 4 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The current QSAAL signaling protocol timer values and SSCOP configuration parameters for the specified port are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example SSCOP Timers Table 25 shows the SSCOP Timers displayed by the commana Table 25 SSCOP Timers SSCOP Timer Description Poll The maximum time between transmission of a POLL PDU when SD or SDP PDUs are queued for transmission or are outstanding pending acknowledgment Ke
143. Pour vous prot ger les yeux lors de l installation du Module de Switch Fabric ATM respectez les pr cautions suivantes Bien que les LEDs et lasers des communications de donn es utilis s dans ce produit soient conformes aux normes d exposition oculaires ventuelle 3Com vous recommande comme pour toute lumi re vive de ne pas regarder directement la source de lumi re Les d charges lectrostatiques peuvent endommager des l ments du module Ces d charges qui surviennent lors d une manipulation inad quate du module peuvent entrainer une d faillance temporaire ou permanente ATTENTION Pour viter des dommages lectrostatiques m Assurez vous d tre bien branch a la terre Utilisez un sous pied et un tapis reli a la terre ou portez un bracelet mis a la terre et veillez a ce que le contact dermique soit bon m Conservez le module dans un sac antistatique jusqu a son installation 36 CHAPTER 2 STARTING UP Pr cautions de Respectez les pr cautions suivantes lorsque vous manipulez le M odule de Manipulation Switch Fabric ATM m Tenez le module par son panneau avant ou comme indique dans le ATM Switch Fabric Module Getting Started Guide m Ne touchez pas les l ments broches branchements ou soudures m Avant d ins rer le module dans le chassis assurez vous que les poign es d insertion d jection sont ouvertes m Lorsque vous faites glisser le module dans le chassis faites coincider les rai
144. S in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch after the next reboot This command also enables the resident LESs Command Actions Enter menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 1 1 5 2 2 1 SYS Platform Setup 1 SET Switch Setup 5 SLE LE Setup 2 LCS LECS Setup 2 ELS Enable LECS services 11522 The LECS is enabled after the next reboot The LES is also enabled LECS service status is set for the next reboot The following message is displayed LECS service status is set for the next reboot 216 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Disable LECS Disable the LECS in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS PLatform Setup 1 SET Switch Setup 5 SLE LE Services Setup LCS LECS setup 3 DLS Disable LECS services Direct access sequence 11 5 2 3 Command Result System action taken The LECS is disabled System message display LECS service status is set for the next reboot Example Enter 1 15 2 3 The following message is displayed LI ECS service status is set for the next reboot LAN Emulation Redundancy Setup You can set up the LAN Emulation redundancy services as follows m Display LECS Redundancy Add LECS to LECS Order Database Delete LECS from LECS Order Database
145. SG ENTE PNNI Optimization Metrics Table 2 RWW 3c MRE VBR R 3 Gjort CrCl 3 Gre CEE 3 Ge Ciccl 2 Gpr av C 0 opt_admin_weight to continue Set Optimization for CBR Updates the Constant Bit Rate CBR optimization parameter A change to the CBR optimization parameter takes place immediately Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration Enter menu sequence 1 1 9 4 3 5 OPT Optimization Metrics 2 SOP Set Optimization Metrics 1 OCR Optimization for CBR 5 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range constant bit rate 0 6 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 5 2 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The CBR optimization parameter is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 119435212 The following message is displayed Default Value is 3 opt_ctd New value is 2 opt_av_cr Press ENTER to continue The value of the CBR optimization parameter is updated 378 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Optimization for RealTime VBR Updates the Real Time Variable Bit Rate VBR optimization parameter A change to the RtVBR optimization parameter takes place immediately Command Actions SYS Platform Conf
146. Selecting Menu Options 45 Example Changing a Password 45 Direct Access to Submenus 46 Entering Multiple Parameters 47 Quick Key Functions 47 Logging Out 48 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Password Setup 50 Update Read access Password 51 Update Write access Password 52 Update Admin access Password 53 Set Password to Factory Default 54 Setting Up forManagement 55 Display Current IP Configuration 56 Update IP Address 57 Display Current NMS IP Address 58 Update NMS Address 59 Display Current Default Gateway IP Address 60 Update Default Gateway IP Address 61 Display Current IP Subnet Mask 62 Update IP Subnet Mask 63 Display Current Read Community String 64 Update Read Community String 65 Display Current Write Community String 66 Update Write Community String 67 Display Ethernet Encapsulation Type 68 Update Ethernet Encapsulation Type 69 Set Management Configuration to Factory Defaults 70 Setting the Port Network Connection Type 71 Display Network Connection Type 72 Update Port Network Connection Type 75 Reset NNI Configuration 76 Resetting All Parameters 77 Reset All 77 Reset All Except IP Addresses 78 Downloading System Software 78 Display Software Download Status 79 Download System Software by TFTP 81 Download System Software by Serial Port 82 Upload Configuration 83 Download Switch LANE PNNI Configuration 84 Managing Switch Fabric Modules 86 Display Switch Fabric Module Status 86 Reset Switch 88 Reset Standby Switch Fabric Module
147. T Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 4 TIM Timers 18 STD Set All Timers to their Default Values if Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Confirm reset yorn Direct access sequence 119 4 3 4 18 Command Result System action taken All the timers are reset to their default values System message display All timers were set to their defaults Example Enter 11943418y The following message is displayed PNNI Node 1 of 1 All Timers were set to their defaults Press ENTER to continue All the timers are set to the default values 374 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Setting Optimization Metrics The following commands allow you to set up the optimization metrics for the network m Get Optimization Metrics Set Optimization for CBR Set Optimization for RealTime VBR Set Optimization for NonRealTime VBR Set Optimization for ABR Set Optimization for UBR Set Optimization for All Classes to Default Get Optimization Metrics Displays the PNNI optimization metrics table This table contains the current values of all the optimization metrics for each class of service For more information on QoS optimization metrics see Path Selection on page 197 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configur
148. Table ROW NEW value Scope Mapping Table Parameters Table 49 shows the scope mapping table parameters required by the command Table 49 Scope Mapping Table Parameters Name Description Table Index The row number in the scope mapping table PNNI Level The hierarchical level in the network structure Example Enter 1 19 4 45 2 15 32 The following message is displayed PNNI Scope Mapping Table ROW new valu Index Name Pnni Level 15 pnniScopeGlobal 32 Press ENTER to continue The hierarchical level of pnniScopeGlobal is updated to 32 398 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Scope Mapping Table to Defaults Resets all the parameters of the scope mapping table to their default values A change to the scope mapping table parameters takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI ICF Interface Configuration 5 SMT Scope Mapping Table Configuration 3 SST Set Scope Mapping Table to defaults Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Confirm reset yorn Direct access sequence 119445 3 Command Result System action taken The scope mapping table parameters are reset to their default values as defined in the PNNI specification af pnni 0080_000 System message display PNNI Scope Mapping Table is set to default values Example Enter 119 445 3
149. Type Display the current Ethernet encapsulation type of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The Ethernet encapsulation type parameter determines how the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch interprets Ethernet frames that enter through the Ethernet management port For more information see Ethernet Encapsulation Type on page 172 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 2 MNG Management Setup 7 ETH Ethernet Type Setup 1 GET Get Ethernet Typ Direct access sequence 11271 Command Result System action taken The current Ethernet Type configuration is displayed System message display Current Eth Type is Example Enter 1 1271 The following message is displayed Current Eth Type is ETH The current Ethernet Type configuration is displayed Update Ethernet Encapsulation Type gt gt Setting Up forManagement 69 Update the Ethernet encapsulation type of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The options are m 1 ETH Standard encapsulation according to 802 3 m 0 LLC Enhanced encapsulation The default Ethernet encapsulation type is 1 ETH For more information see Ethernet Encapsulation Type on page 172 in the Operations Guide The Ethernet encapsulation type is updated after the next reboot Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configu
150. UBR admin weight parameter is updated to its new value System message display Default Value is 5040 New value is set to lt n gt Example Enter 1 19 4 4 2 6 18000 The following message is displayed Default value is 5040 new value is set to 19000 Press ENTER to continue Reset PNNI Interface Resets all the PNNI interface parameters for the specified interface port Parameters to Default as selected in the Select Port option to their default values The Values parameter reset takes place immediately See Select Port for Interface Parameter Setting on page 383 for details Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 4 ICF Interface Configuration 2 IPR Interface Parameters 8 SDF Set to Defaults 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Confirm reset yorn Direct access sequence 119442 8 Command Result System action taken The interface parameters for the specified port are set to their default values System message display Interface parameters were set to their defaults Example Ente 1194427y The following message is displayed Interface parameters were set to their defaults Press ENTER to continue 392 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Reset All PNNI Interface Parameters to Default Values Resets all the
151. VCI status status iL al lt 2 il eal Salis PVC P2P 3 200 Active Active Calling N Port Static Connection Parameters Table 22 shows the port static connection parameters displayed by the command Table 22 Port Static Connection Parameters Name Description Connection number Call number Port number Member number Connection Type Connection VPI Connection VCI Operational Status Administration Status Originator CLP Number identifying the connection Number identifying the call Number identifying the port Sequential numbering of ATM addresses registered at a port Used to specify SVC Whether the connection is using SVC or PVC and if itisa point to point P2P or point to multipoint P2M call The Virtual Path Identifier VPI value defined for the connection The Virtual Channel Identifier VCI value defined for the connection The operational status of the connection active or not The administration status of the connection active or not Whether the connection originates at the calling UNI or the called UNI The action which is to be performed on the CLP bit The possible values are clear bit 0 set bit 1 or no change N 150 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Display Inactive Address Port Connections Display a connection relating to a specific VPI VCI of the port or all connections related to de registered addresses Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence
152. Vv V V V Vv A A A A A A A A A A A mM mM mM mM M mM mM M M M GQ Ce tN rp ER ns B gq gq FE Fy 53 i Ty Wh He Gay D See fey IG fe ko lp iS Dem A ms De A a a aA V Vv V V V Vv Vv Vv W V Vv A A A A A A A A A A A N N N N N N N N N N N al ielest Sloasl Sl sl Sl Sl Sl Sl Bl Si BS St St a Ol gq gq A A A qe gq el 2 WN Ga ER ss Wp 1D Kes ip iy ip er 4D 4D SS OD e l d i v v v v v v v v v v Vv A A A A A A A A A A A rA 1 1 1 1 1 1 c al c Ep HHAH sn OG OD A A aA A A teh 32 IN S D Co Sy A Wey D Ke Ip HD re HD IN ID asi XO tp Sl H col v v v v v v v v v v v So hy ce wy no a ca i ce Wy ca Wy ca iy co 0 co TW co ty oO OW So Sd Baa By is Bs Bid B my By sy sy SB ES Sou va vee eae ee wae wae ee eae veal Ow OG OG OG OG Oe OG OS GO GO GO N ay gt fol 1S fol 1S fol 155 fol 1S fol gt fol 5 fo 55 fo SS oh SS O 74 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Example Enter 1 1 3 3 The following information is displayed for a 7 slot chassis BOTE Pon ROME ROTE Pore Por Pon Value Value Value Value Value Value BS Ye ed NG e nh fon io 6 PHPHPHPHPHRPH EB SI C el ele el el oll oll oll Oy E tO G aS Ge GG iw GS aee Ee a ae 2 aS E 2 o PHPHPHPHPHRP HB I one ore Ore ora ae Bae ace N C
153. W Device Management Traffic Management You can use the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Local Management Application LMA or Transcend Enterprise M anager or other SNM P based network management application to manage your CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch LMA isa character oriented menu driven user interface for performing system level administration You operate this console from a terminal or terminal emulation software or through a remote terminal protocol such as Telnet or Remote Login For more complete network management use an external SNM P based application such as Transcend Enterprise M anager Transcend provides logical views and control for your network In addition it extends the SNMP capabilities of the ATM Enterprise Switch with a common user interface and easy to use administrative features that optimize network configuration oversight and troubleshooting Traffic management in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch is done at two levels m Preventing congestion m Handling congestion Mechanisms for Preventing Congestion The following flow control mechanisms for automatic management in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Fabric M odule work to prevent cell and frame loss under intense loads Explicit Forward Congestion Indication EFC M arking Call Admission Control Flow Control CLP bit tagging support Priorities Scheduling
154. W Set Default Gateway 1 2 3 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Default gateway address Valid IP address Direct access sequence 1 1 2 3 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The default gateway address is updated System message display Default Gateway address was successfully set for the next reboot Example Enter 1 1 2 3 2 100 1 0 254 The following message is displayed Default Gateway address was successfully set for the next reboot The Default Gateway IP address is updated to 100 1 0 254 and takes effect after the next reboot 62 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Display the current IP subnet mask of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The IP subnet mask is used in conjunction with the IP Display Current IP Subnet Mask address Command Actions Enter the menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 1 1 241 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 2 MNG Management Setup 4 MSK Subnet Mask Setup 1 GSM Get Subnet Mask 11241 The current IP subnet mask configuration is displayed Current Subnet Mask address The following message is displayed Current Subnet Mask address 255 255 255 0 The current IP subnet mask configuration is displayed Update IP Subnet Mask Setting Up forManagement 63 Update the IP subnet mask of the CoreB
155. a 0 address has multiple SVCs defined by their VPI VCI values Comme Calero wats Member Conn Conn Oper Admin Originator CLP number number number number type VPI VCI status status POSIT MALS lt lt ik AL A aS eis O ZS SVE EZR 0 46 Active Active Calling ESA Oliskey lt lt iles AL abs OZ SViGe PA 0 60 Active Active Called N PU Eess OE IO ASG EZR 0 69 Active Active Calling N BUSA SSS sibs la OZ SViGr PA 0 80 Active Active Called N 20 Silk MAES S lt lt alew Al 6 ee eh 2 SVG EZR 0 109 Active Active Calling N BS abl lt lt a aes LIT 02 SVG PZE 0 111 Active Active Called N ZA a WSZ lt lt a Al 6 Ae OAS SVE EZE 0 160 Active Active Calling N AS SLS Ab aul sal TIROZ OVORA 0 162 Active Active Calling N A SAL lt b oul Sal MOZAS EZE 0 164 Active Active Calling N AIID WA xb e Sal ALO SWAG eae 0 166 Active Active Calling N 209 Sole ek dee TO eC PZE OV 45 Active Active Calling N ATS S22 Lie al ales TENOS RSV EZ 0 59 Active Active Called N ATES wo le S TERORS VO PZE 0 63 Active Active Calling N Press ENTER to continue or x ENTER to exit Sek See lt bh dpe PTOS SVE 2A 0 79 Active Active Called N DZS AOR MEZA S Se lt olenylivenle gt HOSES PZE 0 112 Active Active Called N PHS AS NAAN lt lt ab a al Sales MOBS SVC EZE 0 117 Active Active Calling N SO Ei We 8 Se Opa eg SIAR GR Rea A Great PZE 0 168 Active Active Calming N SOOT ISAI ey onal eg ae TOS SC PZE 0 170 Active Active Calling N SOMS IU NG a
156. ach access level Table 8 Access Levels Access Level Privileges Read Read only privilege Write Right to make local changes to LMA No right to change passwords or parameters that affect the global network Admin All privileges Logging In When you boot the system the following login screen appears CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Access level read write admin Password When you log in for the first time simply press Enter at the Password prompt CAUTION 3Com strongly recommends that you change passwords for security reasons For more information see Example Changing a Password on page 45 ama Starting Up 43 To log in to the LMA 1 Enter your access level default is admin 2 Enter your password After a successful login the Main Menu is displayed as shown in Figure 2 Figure 2 LMA Main Menu CB9000 switch module Main Menu ISYYS Pilrattormecontugqurat tone gt EM LAN Emulation gt CON Connections gt SoS EALS ECS gt DIA Testing and Diagnostics gt Pie AIM Features LOG Logout VER Version FST Fast Setup 44 CHAPTER 4 USING THE LOCAL MANAGEMENT APPLICATION The LMA Menu System The LMA menu system is a set of command menus that are organized in a hierarchical top down fashion Figure 3 shows the menu structure Each command menu contains a numbered list of menu items Each menu item has a
157. action taken The active switch fabric module is reset System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 1 4 2 The following prompt is displayed Do you really want to reboot the switch y n y The switch is rebooted and the following messages are displayed Bootstrap V1 10 Jul 7 1998 CB9000 3Com NCD Moving the file from FLASH to DRAM Going to operational code Managing Switch Fabric Modules 89 Reset Standby Switch Reset the standby switch fabric module Fabric Module Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 4 SWM Switch modules 3 SSM Stand by Switch Module 1 RSS Reset Stand by Switch Module Direct access sequence 1 4 3 1 Command Result System action taken The standby switch fabric module is reset System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 1 431 The following prompt is displayed Do you really want to reboot the switch y n y The switch is rebooted and the following messages are displayed Bootstrap V1 10 Jul 7 1998 CB9000 3Com NCD Moving the file from FLASH to DRAM Going to operational code 90 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Set Standby Switch Fabric Module to Suspended In service Mode Set the standby switch fabric module to suspended in service mode When the standby switch fabric module is suspended it cannot be used to replace the activ
158. age chapter LECS ELAN Database Operations Display all ELANs 2151 249 8 Display elan type amp params 2152 250 8 Edit elan type amp params 2153 251 8 Display all mac addresses 21541 253 8 Delete mac address 21542 254 8 Add new MAC address 21543 255 8 Display all ATM addresses 21551 256 8 Delete ATM address 21552 257 8 Add new ATM address 21553 258 8 Add new elan record 2156 259 8 Delete elan record 225 9 261 8 Edit segment id C23 for TR only 2158 262 8 LAN Emulation Service Redundancy Add redundant LES to ELAN 21591 269 8 Delete redundant LES 21592 270 8 Force ELAN to primary 21593 271 8 Display redundant ELANs general info 21594 273 8 Display redundant ELANSs specific info 21595 275 8 Display redundant LES general info 21596 271 8 Display redundant LES specific info 21597 278 8 LECS Operations LECS statistics 216 263 8 Reset LECS 214 265 8 Table 64 M enu Index continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter Get LECS maximum connection number 2181 266 8 Set maximum connection number 2182 267 8 LAN Emulation Services LES BUS address a oo 280 8 ELANs general info 222 283 8 LES Setup Set amp save LES BUS address 22311 282 8 Get response policy 22312 288 8 Set amp save response policy 22313 290 8 Get LE arp policy 22314 291 8 Set amp save LE arp policy 22315 292 8 Get arp policy for non reg RD 22316 294 8
159. age to an application system or device Information that alerts you to potential personal injury A Warning Table 2 Text Conventions Convention Description Screen displays This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen Syntax The word syntax means that you must evaluate the syntax provided and then supply the appropriate values for the placeholders that appear in angle brackets Example To enable RIPIP use the following syntax SETDefault lt port gt RIPIP CONTrol Listen In this example you must supply a port number for lt port gt Commands The word command means that you must enter the command exactly as shown and then press Return or Enter Commands appear in bold Example To remove the IP address enter the following command SETDefault 0 IP NETaddr 0 0 0 0 The words enter and type When you see the word enter in this guide you must type something and then press Return or Enter Do not press Return or Enter when an instruction simply says type Keyboard key names If you must press two or more keys simultaneously the key names are linked with a plus sign Example Press Ctrl Alt Del Conventions 17 Table 2 Text Conventions continued Convention Description Words in italics Italics are used to m Emphasize a point m Denote a new term at the place where it is defined in the text m Identify
160. ameters Command Result System action taken The timer resolution is updated System message display Timer resolution was successfully set Example Enter 1 1 4 1 2 250 The following message appears Timer resolution was successfully set The timer resolution is updated to 250 msec and saved to flash Display UNI Signaling Timers Signaling Timers 183 Display the current Q93B signaling timer values in seconds These values are the same for all ports because they all work on a common timer Enter any port identifier To alter these values update the timer resolution For more information see Update Protocol Timer Resolution on page 182 Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 4 SIG Signaling setup 2 TMR Get Signaling Q93B timers Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt Direct access sequence 1 1 4 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The current Q93B Signaling timers for all ports are displayed in seconds System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example 184 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Example Enter 1 1 4 2 3 1 2 The following information is displayed showing each message timer name and its value in seconds Timers sec Param id Param name Param value DP CPSs 16 2 OO bAt 120 S G9 sSbeeslo 40 4 q93sbsesls 16 S C
161. any LECs you entered or removed but did not save to flash memory The following prompt is displayed Unsaved changes will be lost some new LECS may enter the system Do you still want to restore Y N Enter y or continue or n to cancel If you enter Y the following message is displayed Restored from flash successfully 328 CHAPTER 10 LEC ELAN ADMISSION SECURITY e e ecco CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI This chapter describes the commands that allow you to configure and manage the PNNI nodes of the network It includes the following topics Viewing the Current PNNI State Configuring PNNI Nodes Setting the Timers Setting Optimization M etrics Setting Interface Parameters M anaging the Scope Mapping Table Configuring the Route Cache Showing PNNI Information PNNI is available in version 3 0 extended only For more information on obtaining software version 3 0 extended contact your 3Com representative 330 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Viewing the Current PNNI State Display PNNI E IISP State b gt The following command allows you to view the current PNNI state Display PNNI E IISP State Displays the PNNI E IISP status and the next reboot state The status is either PNNI or E IISP To change the current state use the Fast Setup For details on the Fast Setup see the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Switch Module Getting Started Guide Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration
162. apping table is displayed on the screen System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Scope Mapping Table Parameters Table 48 describes the parameters displayed in the scope mapping table Table 48 Scope Mapping Table Parameters PNNI Scope Table Index Parameter Description Number pnniScopeLocalNetwork The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing 1 level that lies within the organizational scope value localNetwork pnniScopeLocalNetworkPlusOne The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing 2 level that lies within the organizational scope value localNetworkPlusOne 394 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Table 48 Scope Mapping Table Parameters continued Parameter Description PNNI Scope Table Index Number pnniScopeLocalNetw orkPlusTwo pnniScopeSiteM inusOne pnniScopelntraSite pnniScopeSitePlusOne pnniScopeOrganizationM inusOne pnniScopelntraOrganization pnniScopeOrganizationPlusOne pnniScopeCommunityM inusOne pnniScopelntraCommunity pnniScopeCommunityPlusOne pnniScopeRegional pnniScopelnterRegional pnniScopeGlobal The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value localNetworkPlusTwo The highest level of PNNI hierarchy i e smallest PNNI routing level that lies within the organizational scope value siteM inusOne The highest level of PN
163. arameter Format or Range Confirm Delete y orn Direct access sequence 341 8 Command Result System action taken Delete all inactive PVCs System message display Delete inactive PVCs completed successfully Example Enter 3 4118 The following prompt appears Delete all inactive PVCs from flash Are you sure Y N Enter y to confirm n to cancel The following message appears Delete inactive PVCs completed successfully All inactive PVCs are deleted from the flash memory Delete All PVC Connections of Port Create Permanent Virtual Channel PVC 163 Delete all the PVC connections for a specific port Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM Addresses 1 Pvc PVCs Setup 9 RES Delete all PVCs of port Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all Confirm erase yorn Direct access sequence 3419 Command Result System action taken All PVCs for the specified port are released System message display All PVC at port lt n gt were released Example Enter 3 4119 The following prompt is displayed Delete all PVCs of port lt 5 1 1 gt Are you sure Enter y to confirm n to cancel The following message appears A PVC with call number 2 was released All PVCs at port 5 1 1 were released All PVCs of the specific port are deleted 164 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUA
164. arameters Command Result System action taken The non real time VBR optimization parameter is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt New value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 19435232 The following message is displayed Default Value is 3 opt_ctd New value is 2 opt_av_cr Press ENTER to continue The value of the NonRealTime VBR optimization parameter is updated to 2 380 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Optimization for ABR Updates the Available Bit Rate ABR optimization parameter A change to the ABR optimization parameter takes place immediately Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI 1 9 4 3 NCF Node Configuration 5 OPT Optimization Metrics 2 SOP Set Optimization Metrics 4 OAR Optimization for ABR Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range constant bit rate 0 6 Direct access sequence 11 9 4 3 5 2 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The ABR optimization parameter is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt New value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 19435244 The following message is displayed Default Value is 3 opt_ctd New value is 4 opt_ctv Press ENTER to continue
165. are Versions number m Display ATM Features m Display Software Versions Display ATM Features Display the ATM features available on this CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 6 FTR ATM Features Direct access sequence 6 Command Result System action taken Displays ATM features System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 6 The following information is displayed OV Ca siignaleingmcomplaranive witty UNTE PVC support via management PZP SUPPONE P2M support ILMI address registration compliant with UNI 3 0 3 1 LE services are not supported MES PI SUP DO tate REO CANNI iS ALSie Sbhoyooucie Ione ININAL VPs ViGIs perm OCS OX le A ame AX ET Xi KO XK MAX VP VPI VCI per OC12 MAX VPI 7 MAX VCI 1023 EMAX VOTES Se MAX VOTES I 104 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Display Softw are Versions Display the software versions currently installed in the LMA and in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Interface M odules Consult your release notes for latest software version numbers Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 8 VER Version Direct access sequence 8 Command Result System action taken The software versions are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 8 The following information is displayed CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enter
166. at on page 196 in the Operations Guide for more information on E 164 Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 2 EEA Enhanced E164 Address Support 2 SET Set amp Save Enhanced E 164 Addr Support State Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range E 164 address support 0 to disable enhanced E 164 address support state 1 to enable enhanced E 164 address support Direct access sequence 119 4 2 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The status of the enhanced E 164 address support state is updated to ENABLED or DISABLED System message display Enhanced E 164 Address Support is DISABLED ENABLED Example Enter 1194221 The following message is displayed Enhanced E 164 Address Support is ENABLED The status of the enhanced E 164 address support is set to ENABLED and is saved in flash memory Get Node Index Displays the number of PNNI nodes defined in the switch and the current PNNI node index The default node index value is 1 and cannot be changed for this version Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 1 SEN Select Node 1 GNI Get Node Index Direct access sequence 1194311 Command Res
167. ated for the selected port System message display LECS via ILMI is set to lt ENABLED DISABLED gt Example Enter 1 18 3 2 3 1 2 1 The following message is displayed LECS via ILMI is set to ENABLED The LECS via ILM status of port 3 1 2 is enabled 120 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Display ILMI Channel Polling Status Display the ILM I channel polling facility status for the specified port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch If enabled the ILM I channel VPI VCI 0 16 is periodically polled for connectivity For more information see Status Information on page 52 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 8 IME ILMI Setup 5 POL Polling Setup 1 GST Get Polling Status Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all ports Direct access sequence 1 1 8 4 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The ILM Polling status for the specified port is displayed System message display ILMI polling is lt ENABLED DISABLED gt Example Enter 1 1 8 41 3 1 2 The following message is displayed ILMI polling is ENABLED Update ILMI Channel Polling Status ILMI Setup 121 Update and save the channel polling facility status for the specified port in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM
168. ated not updated when an ADD PARTY route is calculated System message display Save Drop PNNI cache when ADD PARTY route is calculated Example Enter 1 19463 The following message is displayed Save PNNI cache when ADD PARTY route is calculated 402 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Cache State for ADD PARTY Determines whether or not the last cache accumulated for a route between a specific source and any destination that has previously been accessed will continue to be used when an ADD PARTY route is added Save or will be reinitialized Drop The default cache state for ADD PARTY is Save If the cache refresh is dropped all caches for recently calculated routes will be reinitialized A change to the cache refresh status takes place immediately Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 6 SCR Set Route Cache UBR Configuration 4 GCS Set Cache Refresh for ADD PARTY Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Include Add Party Route 0 save 1 drop Direct access sequence 1111910464 Command Result System action taken The PNNI cache is updated not updated when an ADD PARTY route is calculated System message display Save Drop PNNI cache when ADD PARTY route is calculated Example Enter 1 1 94641 The following message is displayed Drop Cache after ADD PARTY
169. ation see LANE Security on page 145 in the Operations Guide m Save Security Configuration m Restore Security Configuration Saves the security lists for all ELANs in the switch to flash memory Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 4 SAV Save security configuration Direct access sequence 2 3 4 Command Result System action taken The security lists for all ELANs in the switch are saved to flash memory System message display Saved on flash successfully Example Enter 2 3 4 The security lists for all ELANs in the switch are saved to flash memory The following message is displayed Saved on flash successfully Restore Security Configuration Restores the security lists for all ELANs in the switch from flash memory Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 5 RES Restore security config Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Continue prompt YorN Direct access sequence 2 3 5 Command Result System action taken The security lists for all ELANs in the switch are restored from flash memory System message display Restored from flash successfully Example Enter 2 3 5 The security lists for all ELANs in the switch are restored from flash memory The current contents of the security lists are overwritten including
170. ative weight of this interface port for the constant bit rate service category Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI ICF Interface Configuration 2 IPR Interface Parameters 2 CBR CBR Admin Weight Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range CBR admin weight 1 2147483647 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 4 2 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The CBR admin weight parameter is updated to its new value System message display Default value is 5040 new value is set to lt n gt Example Enter 1 19 4 4 2 2 6000 The following message is displayed Default value is 5040 new value is set to 6000 Press ENTER to continue Set RtVBR Administrative Weight Sets the RtVBR Administrative Weight parameter The RtVBR administrative weight is the administrative weight of this interface port for the real time variable bit rate service category Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 4 ICF Interface Configuration IPR Interface Parameters 3 RVW RtVBR Admin Weight Entera parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range RtVBR admin weight 1 2147483647 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 4 2 3 parameters Command Result System action taken The RtVBR a
171. ault password press Enter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 1 PAS Password Setup 3 ADM Set Admin Password Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Old passw ord Enter the old password New password 0 to 8 alphanumeric characters New password Enter the password exactly as you did before confirmation Direct access sequence 1 1 1 3 parameters Command Result System action taken The admin access password is updated System message display The password has been changed Example Enter 1 11 3 The following dialog is displayed Note that the passwords themselves are not displayed Enter the old admin password oldpass Enter the new admin password newpass Enter the new admin password again newpass The password has been changed The admin access password is updated 54 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Set Password to Factory Default b gt Reset the passwords to their factory default settings for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch These are for each type of user read access write access and administer access For more information on access levels see the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Switch Fabric M odule Getting Started Guide To accept the default password press Enter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 1 PAS Password Setup 4 PAS Set Password
172. ay Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 1943 4 11 15 The following message is displayed Default Value is 25 new value is 15 Press ENTER to continue 368 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set CTD Proportional Multiplier Sets the CTD proportional multiplier percentage The CTD proportional multiplier percentage is a percentage of the last advertised M aximum Cell Transfer Delay A change to the CTD proportional multiplier percentage value takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 4 TIM Timers 12 CTD CTD Proportional Multiplier 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range percentage 1 99 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 12 parameters Command Result System action taken The CTD proportional multiplier is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt New value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 19 43 4 12 25 The following message is displayed Default Value is 50 new value is 25 Press ENTER to continue Set SVCC Initiation Time Sets the SVCC initiation time The SVCC initiation time is the time it takes to reinitiate a Switched Virtual Channel Connection after it has been taken down For mo
173. be changed 346 Get Peer Group ID CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Displays the Peer Group ID of the PNNI node For more information of peer groups see Organizing a Network Hierarchy on page 183 in the Operations Guide A change to the peer group id takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 3 CHR Characteristics 3 PID Peer Group ID 1 GPI Get Peer Group ID Direct access sequence 11943331 Command Result System action taken The peer group id of the PNNI node is displayed System message display PNNI Node 1 of 1 Node Peer Group Id lt address gt Example Enter 11943331 The following message is displayed PNNI Node 1 of 1 Node Peer Group Id 48 47 00 00 00 00 00 3C 00 00 00 00 00 00 Set Peer Group ID b gt Sets the Peer Group ID of the PNNI node For more information on peer groups see Organizing a Network Hierarchy on page 183 in the Operations Guide Currently the peer group ID cannot be changed via this option To change the peer group ID the ATM address network prefix and node level should be changed See Set ATM Address on page 344 and Set Node Level on page 341 in this chapter for details on how to change these Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration
174. ble 6 lists the steps or sections of the Integrated Fast Setup Sections Table 6 Integrated Fast Setup Procedure Sections Setup Section Description 1 Routing Mode Set the Routing M ode EIISP or PNNI for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch 2 Network Prefix Set Network Prefix for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch 3 PNNI Parameters Set PNNI parameters for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch 4 LE Parameters Set LE parameters for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch 5 LECS Address Set active LECS address for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch 6 UNI NNI parameters Set UNI NNI port parameters for ports in the ATM Interface Module 7 IP and Management Set IP address of the switch address of the NMS Configuration application default gateway address and subnet mask 8 Confirmation Confirm setup operation Entering Data The Integrated Fast Setup procedure runs sequentially through the relevant data for all of the sections displaying a prompt for each data item and a default value If you want to change the default enter a different value in place of the default If you want to accept the default press Enter Navigation Aids Table 7 lists the shortcut characters that you can use to move between sections of the Integrated Fast Setup procedure Table 7 Integrated Fast Setup Procedure Navigation Aids Type ToGo lt Back to previous section gt To next section gt S To section indicated
175. blocking ATM Switch Fabric Module features highly integrated ASICs that account for its scalable leading edge performance and functionality The module incorporates on board ATM control hardware for scaling the performance of Switched Virtual Channel Connections SVCs and Switched Virtual Paths SVPs 26 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW Figure 1 shows the front panel of the ATM Switch Fabric Module Note that in the figure the Module is shown on its side in the 16 slot chassis or the 8 slot chassis you install it vertically with the LEDs on top Figure 1 ATM Switch Fabric M odule Front Panel Module Status LED LAN PC Card Slots RS 232 Console Port 3 Interfaces to ATM E Za 5 e E lll ll The Module Status LED indicates the ATM Switch Fabric M odule s status The dual PCM CIA slots have two indicator LEDs one for each slot and the RS 232 console port has one indicator LED The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch provides wire speed interfaces for ATM OC 3c STM 1 ATM OC 12c STM 4 and ATM 155 Mbps over UTP5 daughter cards which are listed in Table 4 Table 4 ATM Interfaces Module Type No of Ports Rate Mbps OC 3c MMF 4 155 OC 3c SM F2 4 155 OC 3c STM 1 MM1 4 155 OC 3c STM 1 SM2 4 155 OC 3c STM 1 SM LR 2 155 OC 12c STM 4 MM 1 622 OC12c STM 4 SM IR 1 622 155 Mbps over UTP5 4 155 1MM multimode 2SM single mode These cell based daughter cards are designed to be installed into ATM Interface Modules
176. c Set Shortcut Setup Frame Count Sets the MPC p1 shortcut setup frame count parameter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 2 MPC MPOA Client Configuration 2 MP1 Set shortcut setup frame count Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter shortcut setup frame count Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Format or Range 1 65535 2522 The shortcut setup frame count parameter is set Parameter changed successfully 238 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Set Shortcut Setup Frame Time Sets the M PC p2 shortcut setup frame time parameter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 2 MPC MPOA Client Configuration 3 MP2 Set shortcut setup frame time Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter shortcut setup frame time Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Format or Range 1 60 seconds 25 2 3 The shortcut setup frame time parameter is set Parameter changed successfully Set Flow Detection Protocols Sets the M PC p3 flow detection protocols parameter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 PA MPOA Devices Configuration 2 MPC MPOA Client Configuration 4 MP3 Set flow detection protocols Ent
177. catenated with or followed by a sequential number It provides a sequential numbering of ATM addresses registered at a port It is used to specify the connection YES address is static NO address is NNI 130 Display De registered ATM Addresses at Port CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Display UME static ATM or NNI addresses at the specified port that were de registered via LMA or UME but whose connections are still active Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 1 ADD Get ATM Addresses 3 ACT Get Not Active Registered ATM Addresses at Port Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Port ID Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 3 1 3 0 0 Format or Range lt slot group port gt or 0 0 forall ports 3 1 3 parameters The de registered UME static ATM or NNI addresses for the specified port are displayed Information is displayed as shown in the example The following information is displayed Port ATM address Network prefix ATM address user_part Member number number 6S sdk giles ATs Os he Ws OFSCq Os Oslo a Bae OB hs Seb oy TS ag tate at SOT CS oil yas A Os Oe Ws O43Cq OW Osean He Ree Sata o TE ta oa a 82 05 ATM Addresses Port Table 131 Parameters Table 18 describes the parameters displayed by the command Table 18 Parameters Name Description Port ID ATM port id ATM addre
178. ch presented according to type of channel SVC or PVC and type of call P2P or P2M Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 4 STS Statistics 2 ATM ATM layer 1 GEN Get SVC PVC total calls Direct access sequence 4 2 1 Command Result System action taken The total number of calls existing in the switch is displayed according to channel type and call type System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example 194 CHAPTER 8 VIEWING STATISTICS Example Enter 4 2 1 The following information is displayed Calls summary Total number of PVC P2P calls Total number of PVC P2M calls Total number of SVC P2P calls Total number of SVC P2M calls A ON HF ATM Layer Statistics 195 Display Counters Per Display counters for a specified port or for all ports Port Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 4 STS Statistics 2 ATM ATM Layer 2 GPR Get Counters Per Port Direct access sequence 4 2 2 Command Result System action taken Calls summary information is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 4 2 2 The following information is displayed Received total cells from port 2 Transmitted total cells on port 8 Received cells with correctable hec 5 196 CHAPTER 8 VIEWING STATISTICS Display Counters Per VPI VCI Display total cells through a connection specified by its VPI VCI
179. ching system due to border routing failure The total number of times where the switching system failed to compute a viable DTL stack as the destination was unreachable Example Enter 119471 The following information is displayed Node 1 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c000000000000 00c0da600047 ff Pirsig Wel bengen Type SSE NO CSUN bi rerine DSsewajoe Lon il 68 Gry al 95ae 35780 Nodal Inform 4 92 208m S9a7 25850 Horizont bink 34 76 gee COSE SIVAN Int Reach Addr Topology Node 1 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c000000000000 00c0da600047 f LocPort RemPort Remote node 3 1 48a0 47 00000000003c000002000000 00c0da000004 ff Address prefixes Address Length Node 47 00000000003c000000000000 104 48a0 47 00000000003c0000000 47 00000000003c00000000eeee 104 48a0 47 00000000003c0000000 47 00000000003c000002000000 104 48a0 47 00000000003c0000020 47 00000000003c000003000000 104 48a0 47 00000000003c0000030 NeighbourPeerTable Remot eNodeld State PoOrccount 48a0 47 00000000003c00000000eeee 00c0da000001 ff Full 2 48a0 47 00000000003c000002000000 00c0da000004 ff Full iL Summary Address Table Enter X lt Enter gt gt Exit C lt Enter gt gt Continuous print lt Enter gt gt Next scre SNMP Node Index il Internal Summaries Address Len Supp State ATO OOOO CTC COSC OOO O00 0 CUO OUR ere ao 104 No Advertise End of Summary Address Table SESE LSCLSS 8 DTL Count Originator CrankBack Count Originator Alternate DTL Count Origi
180. cific port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch to the ATM address of a specific LEC in an edge device attached to another port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch To specify the ATM address at a port for an SVC specify the member number for a PVC specify the port number slot group port Calls routed to an ATM address are differentiated by their Call number The Call number is allocated by the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch during the time the call is initiated and uniquely identifies the call in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch More than one call can be routed to a single ATM address at one time For example when a bridged Ethernet LAN is attached to a single LEC all calls to the stations on the LAN are transmitted to that LEC s ATM address If you do not know the Call number of the call whose information you want to display enter 0 for the Call number and a list of calls routed to the ATM address are displayed together with their Call IDs You can read the desired Call number from this list according to the VPI VCI number for example Display Call Routing 141 Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 2 RTG Routing 1 CLL Calls Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range For SVC ATM address lt slot group port gt sequential number member For example 11102 For PVC Port number lt slot group port gt Call number Call number or 0 for a
181. configuration status of port 3 1 2 is enabled 116 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Display Auto discovery Status Display the auto discovery status for the specified port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Auto discovery determines by negotiation the common protocol parameters ATM interface type and IME type to be used by the ILM channel The status can be either enabled or disabled For more information about auto discovery see Auto Discovery on page 57 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 8 IME ILMI Setup 3 AUD 1 GET Auto Discovery Setup Get Auto Discovery ON OFF Status Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Port ID Format or Range lt slot group port gt Direct access sequence 1 1 8 2 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The auto configuration status for the specified port is displayed System message display Auto Configuration is lt ENABLED DISABLED gt Example Enter 1 1 8 2 1 3 1 2 The following message is displayed ENABLED Auto Configuration is Update Auto discovery status ILMI Setup 117 Enable or disable the auto discovery status for the specified port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Auto discovery determines by negotiation the common protocol parameters ATM interface type and IM E type to b
182. contains a module and whether or not the module is operational There are three possible status values m Occupied Operational module in slot m Fail Non operational module in slot m Free No module in slot Switch Type Specifies the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Fabric Module type m 22x22 ATM Switch Module Switch Mode Can be a Initialize a Active online m Standby Inservice In Srv STBY m Standby Suspend Suspend STBY Memory Size Specifies the memory capacity of the switch m 64MB extendable to 128 MB or 192 MB 88 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Reset Switch b gt Reset the active switch fabric module After the switch has been reset the system is rebooted While the system reboots approx 5 minutes the standby switch automatically becomes active When the standby switch fabric module is active anew main menu containing the following four options is displayed m 1 Display Switch status For details see Display Switch Fabric Module Status on page 86 m 2 Reset Standby Switch Fabric Module For details see Reset Standby Switch Fabric Module on page 89 m 3 Logout For details see Logout on page 100 m 4 Version For details see Display Software Versions on page 104 Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 4 SWM Switch modules 2 RSM Reset Switch Direct access sequence 1 4 2 Command Result System
183. cs 2 SOP Set Optimization Metrics 6 ODF Set Optimization for All Classes to Default Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Confirm reset yorn Direct access sequence 119435 2 6 Command Result System action taken All the optimization parameters are reset to their default values System message display All optimization metrics were set to their defaults Example Enter 11943526y The following message is displayed PNNI Node 1 of 1 All op Press timization metrics were set to their defaults ENTER to continue Select Port for Interface Parameter Setting Selects the port for which the interface parameters will be set Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI 4 ICF Interface Configuration 1 SPT Select Port Enter menu sequence 1 1 9 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range port number slot subslot port Direct access sequence 119 4 4 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The specified port is set to the active port ready for configuration System message display Current port number is lt slot subslot port gt Example Enter 1 19441 4 2 1 The following message is displayed Current port number is 4 2 1 384 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Setting Interface Parameters The following commands all
184. ction taken The parameters for the specified ELAN are updated The update takes place immediately System message display elan type is lt n gt max frame size is lt n gt t Example Enter 2 1 5 3 elan69_14 1 1 The following prompt appears elan type is 1 max frame size is 1 Are you sure y n y Enter y to confirm n to cancel reset The parameters of the ELAN elan69_14 are updated Display ELAN MAC Display the MAC address inserted by a specified ELAN Addresses Command Actions LEM LAN Emulation LCS LE Configuration Service LNT LECS Network topology 4 MAC MAC Addresses Info 1 MAD Display all MAC addresses Enter menu sequence 2 1 5 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 Direct access sequence 2 1 5 4 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The MAC addresses for the selected ELAN are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 2 15 4 1 elan 73 9 The following information is displayed lSikeune einh las erckehes 47 0 0 0 0 0 36 0 0 4a0 0 0 0 0 C0 ceh 60 1 aa 0 al IA FAS pA oO oth8 5 le 254 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Delete ELAN MAC Delete a MAC address inserted from an ELAN Address Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS
185. cument Format PDF or Hypertext markup Language HTML from the 3Com World Wide Web support site at http support 3com com In the Select Product by Name list under Support Tools Documents and Information select CoreBuilder Year 2000 Compliance 23 3Com Facts The 3Com Facts automated fax service provides technical articles Automated Fax diagrams and troubleshooting instructions on 3Com products 24 hours a Service Documents day 7 days a week Call 3Com Facts using your Touch Tone telephone 1 408 727 7021 Year 2000 For information on the Year 2000 compliance and 3Com products visit Compliance the 3Com Year 2000 Web page http www 3com com products yr2000 htm1 24 ABOUT THIS GUIDE e e teer OVERVIEW This chapter provides an overview of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The following topics are covered m CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Characteristics m Software Release 3 0 Key Features m Standards and Protocols Supported CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Characteristics The ATM Switch Fabric Module The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch has two components m The ATM Switch Fabric Module m The ATM Interface Module For information about the ATM Interface Module see the ATM Interface M odule User Guide and the ATM Interface M odule Getting Started Guide The ATM Switch Fabric Module has a switching capacity of 15 Gbps The high performance line rate non
186. d Result System action taken The call proceeding enable flag is updated System message display Call proceeding flag was successfully set to lt ON OFF gt Example Enter 114621 The following message appears Call proceeding flag was successfully set to ON The call proceeding enable flag is updated to on and saved to flash Reset Signaling Configuration Signaling Setup 179 Reset the signaling configuration parameters for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch to their factory default settings All signaling timers are set to default as UNI and the UNI version is set to 3 0 The reset takes effect immediately Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 4 SIG Signaling Setup 7 SIG Set signaling configuration to factory defaults Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Confirm Reset Y orn Direct access sequence 11 4 7 Command Result System action taken The signaling configuration parameters are reset to their factory default values System message display Signaling Configuration was set to defaults Example Enter 1 147 The following prompt appears Do you really want to reset config Y N Y Enter y to confirm n to cancel Signaling Configuration was set to defaults The signaling configuration parameters are set to their factory values 180 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Signaling Timers Display Pr
187. d to the edge device or end user that has sent a signaling SETUP message For more information see CALL PROCEEDING Message on page 91 in the Operations Guide When the call proceeding value is ON the call proceeding message is sent When the call proceeding value is OFF the call proceeding message is Suppressed Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 4 SIG Signaling setup 6 CCL Signaling call control setup 1 GET Get call proceeding value Direct access sequence 11 461 Command Result System action taken The call proceeding enable flag is displayed System message display Call proceeding value is lt ON OFF gt Example Enter 11461 The following message is displayed Call proceeding value is ON 178 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Update Call Proceeding Enable Value Update the signaling call proceeding enable flag and save it to flash memory See the previous section for more details Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 4 SIG Signaling setup 6 CCL Signaling call control setup 2 SET Set call proceeding value Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Call proceeding message 0 to suppress call proceeding messages off enable disable value 1 to send call proceeding messages on Direct access sequence 1 1 4 6 2 parameters Comman
188. de level 340 get number of nodes 332 get peer group ID 346 get PGL priority 354 H handling precautions 34 hello holddown timer setting 358 hello inactivity factor setting 360 hello interval setting 359 hello packet interval 359 sending rate 358 high priority queue 144 PVC call 155 452 INDEX humidity operating 421 storage 421 l i960 processor 27 ILMI channel polling interval displaying 122 ILMI version displaying 112 in connection ATM address 144 port ID 144 VCI 144 VPI 144 installation daughter cards 38 into chassis 38 prerequisites 38 safety precautions 33 Installation Guides Power Supply 38 interface card administrative status 94 clock mode 94 media type 94 operational status 93 94 port ID number 93 94 port interface type 94 Interface Evolution MIB 31 Interface LEDs 422 interface management 30 interface module compatible with 8 Port Board 26 multimode fiber 26 short reach single mode 26 type 26 interface parameters resetting to default values 391 392 setting 383 384 Interim InterSwitch Protocol ISP general 31 Interim Local Management Interface ILM I general 31 internal clock source setting 110 interval channel polling 122 intervals PTSE refresh 361 setting 356 IP configuration 72 120 167 displaying 56 J join privilege of LEC changing 321 join state 301 K key features of the CoreBuilder 9000 30 L LAN 300 LAN Emulation reset statistics 311 service
189. ded 3Com s sole obligation under this express warranty shall be at 3Com s option and expense to refund the purchase price paid by Customer for any defective software product or to replace any defective media with software which substantially conforms to applicable 3Com published specifications Customer assumes responsibility for the selection of the appropriate applications program and associated reference materials 3Com makes no warranty or representation that its software products will meet Customer s requirements or work in combination with any hardware or applications software products provided by third parties that the operation of the software products will be uninterrupted or error free or that all defects in the software products will be corrected For any third party products listed in the 3Com software product documentation or specifications as being compatible 3Com will make reasonable efforts to provide compatibility except where the non compatibility is caused by a bug or defect in the third party s product or from use of the software product not in accordance with 3Com s published specifications or user manual YEAR 2000 WARRANTY In addition to the Hardware Warranty and Software Warranty stated above 3Com warrants that each product sold or licensed to Customer on and after January 1 1998 that is date sensitive will continue performing properly with regard to such date data on and after January 1 2000 provided that all othe
190. displayed by the command Table 44 LEC Connection Information Name Description LEC ID LEC ID number State Current LEC state m Joining the LEC is performing Point to Point direct connection to the LES or the LEC is sending the join request m ADD Party the LES is adding the LEC to its Point to M ultipoint distribute connection m Operational the client is now ready to operate CTRL Direct LES member_id and the point to point call_id between the LES mem_id call_id and the LEC MCAST send BUS member _id and the point to point call id between the mem_id call_id ATM Addresses Is Proxy Example ELAN s BUS and the LEC User part of the LEC ATM address Whether the LEC is a proxy or not Enter 2 23210 The LEC information for all LECs of the specified ELAN is displayed as follows LEC State Cie ll Mcast ATM addresses Is id Direct send User part proxy mem_id mem_id CALL clean Gale tench 22 Operational 1 Operational LIGL TIGS I701 TVE L7OL 10 LIONA 43 So 0 46 10 6lo 53 0 YES omeonmdar n saena YES 302 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Display LEC Address Info Display all MAC addresses ATM addresses and Route Descriptors of a specified LEC that are registered in the LES ARP cache of a specified ELAN A LEC is specified by its ID If you do not know a LEC s ID specify a value of 0 to display information for all LECs Command Actions Enter menu sequence
191. dmin access 53 read access 51 write access 52 peer delayed acknowledge interval setting 364 peer group leader election 417 peer group ID displaying 346 updating 347 peer group leader priority 354 displaying 354 updating 355 peer group neighbor 407 information 419 Permanent Virtual Circuit ATM port connection type 147 149 call type 155 port number 155 VCI 155 VPI 155 physical layer statistics displaying 190 resetting 192 PNNI configuring nodes 331 displaying information 405 Routing Control Channel RCC 447 PNNI administrative status displaying 336 PNNI nodes displaying number 332 PNNI topology state element see PTSE PNNI E IISP state displaying 330 point to multipoint call ATM port connection type 147 149 control distribute VCC 144 multicast forward 144 PVC 155 point to point call ATM port connection type 147 149 PVC 155 port in interface modules 26 network connection type 99 number 155 selecting 383 port ID ATM port 147 149 in connection 144 out connection 144 port ID number 93 94 port interface type 94 port network connection type updating 75 power cable installing 38 power supply installing 38 Power Supply Installation Guides 38 PPD 29 precautions handling 34 safety 33 prerequisites installation 38 priority high priority queue 144 low priority queue 144 peer group leader 354 355 PVC call 155 protocol configuration displaying 185 protocol timer resolution displaying 180 protocols communica
192. dmin weight parameter is updated to its new value System message display Default value is 5040 new value is set to lt n gt Example Enter 1 19 4 4 2 3 10500 The following message is displayed Default value is 5040 new value is set to 10500 Press ENTER to continue 388 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set NrtVBR Administrative Weight Sets the NrtVBR Administrative W eight parameter The NrtVBR administrative weight is the administrative weight of this interface port for the non real time variable bit rate service category Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 4 ICF Interface Configuration 2 IPR Interface Parameters 4 NVW NrtVBR Admin Weight Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range NrtVBR admin weight 1 2147483647 Direct access sequence 11 9 4 4 2 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The NrtVBR admin weight parameter is updated to its new value System message display Default Value is 5040 New value is set to lt n gt Example Enter 1 19 4 4 2 4 6000 The following message is displayed Default value is 5040 new value is set to 6000 Press ENTER to continue Set ABR Sets the ABR Administrative Weight parameter The ABR administrative Administrative weight is the administrative weight of this interface port for
193. ds Supported SNMP ATM m MIBII RFC 1213 Signalling UNI 3 0 3 1 m ATOM MIB RFC 1695 ILMI UNI 3 0 3 1 m ATOM 2 Circuit Statistics PNNI IISP E La a Private chassis MIB a LE1 0 CoreBuilder Management and Interface LEDs Table 62 CoreBuilder Management and Interface LEDs Switch Fabric Module m Module Status indication Green Yellow m Primary Secondary SWM indication Green m PCMCIA Card status Green m Control port status RS 232 Green Yellow CoreBuilder Management and Interface Connectors Table 63 CoreBuilder Management and Interface Connectors Management m Management PCMCIA m Control RS 232 9 pin D type standard DTE MENU INDEX eee e The following table shows where to find the description of each menu action in the following chapters The index has the same structure as the menu hierarchy Clicking on the page number in the M gmt Guide column takes you to the command description Clicking on the page number in the Ops Guide column takes you to a theoretical description of topics related to the command Not every command has a corresponding theoretical description Table 64 M enu Index Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter Password Setup Update read access password 1111 51 10 Set write access passw ord boa 12 52 10 Set admin password t13 53 10 Set password configuration to factor
194. e PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 5 OPT Optimization Metrics 1 GOP Get Optimization Metrics Direct access sequence 1194351 Command Result System action taken The PNNI optimization metrics table is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Optimization Metrics Table Parameters Table 46 describes the parameters that may be displayed in the optimization metrics table Table 46 Classes of Service Parameter Description CBR Constant Bit Rate RT VBR Real Time Variable Bit Rate NRT VBR Non Real Time Variable Bit Rate ABR Available Bit Rate UBR Unspecified Bit Rate 376 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Table 47 describes the values that may be assigned to the optimization parameters These parameters are used to determine the path in the network for each Quality of Service Table 47 Optimization Values Value Description 0 opt_admin_weight Optimized Administrative Weight assigned to each 1 opt_max_cr 2 opt_av_cr 3 opt_ctd 4 opt_ctv 5 opt_clr_clp0 6 opt_clr_clp0 1 Example path in the network Optimized Maximum Cell Rate Optimized Average Cell Rate Optimized Cell Transfer Delay Optimized Cell Transfer Variation Optimized Cell Loss Ratio objective for CLP 0 traffic Optimized Cell Loss Ratio objective for CLP 0 1 traffic Enter 1 1 94351 The following information is displayed Ib CIBIRe 4 ABR 5 UBR PO
195. e VPI VCI Range b gt Signaling Setup 169 Update the VPI VCI configuration parameters of the specified port You set maximum and minimum VPI VCI values for each port For more information see Display VPI VCI Range on page 167 Note that when the ILM auto configuration procedure is enabled the VPI VCI limits are determined automatically and override any settings made by this command For more information see Display Current IP Configuration on page 56 Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 4 SIG Signaling setup 3 VCC VPI VCI range setup 2 SET Set VPI VCI range Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all Parameter number 1 for Min VPI 2 for Max VPI 3 for Min VCI 4 for Max VCI Parameter value The VPI VCI value Direct access sequence 1 1 4 3 2 parameters Only one parameter can be defined per command Command Result System action taken The selected VPI VCI configuration parameters are updated for the specified port System message display Parameter was successfully set 170 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Example Enter 1 1 4 3 2 3 1 21 0 The following message appears This operation will release all connections of the specified port s Are you sure Y N Enter y to confirm n to cancel The following message is displayed Parameter was s
196. e changed for this version Therefore in this version a node cannot be defined as a Peer Group Leader Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 7 SHO Show PNNI information 6 PGL PGL Election Direct access sequence 11947 6 Command Result System action taken Peer Group Leader information is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Peer Group Leader Table Parameters Table 56 describes the parameters displayed in the Peer Group Leader table Table 56 Peer Group Leader Table Parameters Parameter Description PGL Leadership Priority The priority of the local node Peer Group Leader The node ID of the peer group leader Preferred PGL The node ID of the preferred PGL 418 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Example Enter 119476 The following information is displayed Level 72 gt PGL Information PGL Leadership Priority 0 PeerGroupLeader 0000 00 000000000000000000000000 000000000000 00 Preferred PGL 0000 00 000000000000000000000000 000000000000 00 Display Peer Group Displays information on the peer group neighbors Neighbor Information Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI SHO Show PNNI information 7 7 NBR N
197. e menu sequence 4 STS Statistics 3 AAL AAL5 layer 2 RST Reset AAL amp SAR counters Direct access sequence 4 3 2 Command Result System action taken The AAL Layer statistics for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch is reset System message display AAL counters were reset successfully Example Enter 4 3 2 The following message is displayed AAL counters were reset successfully The counters are reset 202 CHAPTER 8 VIEWING STATISTICS AAL5 Control Frame Port Statistics Display Control Frame Port Statistics You can display the following AAL5 control statistics m Display Control Frame Port Statistics m Reset Control Frame Port Statistics For information about AAL5 layer control see Signaling AAL on page 99 in the Operations Guide Display control frame statistics for a specified port PDU and SDU statistics are presented Both signaling and ILM I control frame statistics are shown Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 4 STS Statistics 4 CTL Control frames 1 GET Get Control frames counters Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt or 0 0 For all ports Direct access sequence 4 4 1 parameters Command Result System action taken AAL5 layer control frame statistics for the specified port are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 4
198. e switch fabric module Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 1 sys Platform configuration 4 SWM Switch modules 3 SSM Stand by Switch Module 2 SIS Stand by In service Suspended Direct access sequence 1 4 3 2 Command Result System action taken The standby switch is set to suspended in service mode System message display Stand by Switch mode changed to Suspended In Service mode Example Enter 1 4 3 2 The following prompt is displayed Put Stand by Switch to Suspended mode Are you sure Y N y The following message is displayed Stand by Switch mode changed to Suspended mode Upgrade Software Files Managing Switch Fabric Modules 91 Upgrade the software on the standby switch fabric module from the active switch fabric module After upgrading the standby switch fabric module must be reset See Reset Standby Switch Fabric Module on page 89 for details on how to reset the standby switch fabric module Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 4 SWM Switch modules 3 SSM Stand by Switch Module 3 SSU Stand by Software Upgrade 1 USF Upgrade Software Files Direct access sequence 1 4 3 31 Command Result System action taken The software on the standby switch fabric module is updated System message display The upgrading process will start shortly and take about 5 minutes The upgraded files will be active only after
199. e used by the ILM I channel The status can be either enabled or disabled For more information about auto discovery see Auto Discovery on page 57 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 8 IME ILMI Setup 3 AUD Auto Discovery Setup 2 SET Set amp Save Auto Discovery ON OFF Status Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all ports Auto discovery o to disable auto discovery enable disable 1 to enable auto discovery Direct access sequence 1 1 8 2 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The auto discovery status is updated for the selected port immediately and is saved in flash System message display Auto Discovery is lt ENABLED DISABLED gt Example Enter 1 1 8 2 1 3 1 2 The following message is displayed Auto Discovery is ENABLED 118 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Display LECS Access Options Display the current communication channel between LEC and LECS for the specified port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The LECS via ILM parameter determines whether the LEC that is attached to the port connects to the LECS by ILM or by the well known address Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 8 IME ILMI Setup 4 MIB ILMI MIB View
200. ed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Setting the Port Network Connection Type 73 Example Enter 1 1 3 3 The following information is displayed for a 16 slot chassis A A A A A A A A A A A lt lt st st st st x st st st st SESE OE OE Ae Nee New ea aN E T R EE AE TA A E E N EE E EAA a D EAN TE A E aE T H DEN 69 gt a We gt ay I n nA pti gt s 7 OS gt v v v v v v v V V V V A A A A A A A A A A A mM mM mM mM mM M M M M mM el Sl ei ei SS el GS Sl GS fl SS Sl A ish SS is WS fel Z gq qe Z gq g H Jre Ga ay Say gt LW gt i ae Gs gt e pi H H H H v v v v v v v Vv Vv Vv v A A A A A A A A A A A N N N N N N N N N N N CA EEE ENEE EEEN ENEE EG ENEN E SENE ON A NE A OE Beye T AT p SES gt st DP LQ ap We o Ma Ss SA SIN iy 2 FING gt a d a tl Vv v v v v Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv v A A A A A A A A A A A H H Cm od H od H al d Qs Qisl Qs Qe Qe Qe Qe wie Ae A ie SI il aah Pa aa Pa aah aah gt H ye 3 0 3 Sa 3 fife 5 ue ie aS IN gt St J gt qd a 4 H v v v v v v v Vv Vv Vv Vv A A A A A A A A A A A st st st st st st st st st st a a cen ee ae ee Se I a a A AR T EE E ah E e Sy eo Sa ay D ig Sey TOD ie fk te FY a Fa toy Ne 5 tal H sl H Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv
201. ed ELAN See Table 42 for the possible LE_ARP policies Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 3 ELN ELANs Information LSU LES Setup 4 GAR Get LE arp policy Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 Direct access sequence 2 2 3 1 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The response policy for the specified ELAN is updated The update takes place immediately System message display Response policy is lt RESPOND FORWARD REQUEST gt 292 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Example Enter 2 23142 The LE_ARP policy of the ELAN with ELAN ID 2 is displayed as follows Response policy is FORWARD REQUEST LE_ARP Verification Policies Table 42 describes the LE_ARP verification policies Table 42 LE ARP Verification Policies Name Description Respond Checks the address table of the LES in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch If the LAN destination is not found it sends the LE_ARP request to all LECs in the ELAN If the LAN destination is found it sends the LE_ARP response to recipients selected according to the ELAN response policy For more information see Display ELAN Response Policy on page 288 Forward Request Does not check the address table of the LES in the
202. eighbors Direct access sequence 119477 Command Result System action taken Peer Group Neighbor information is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Peer Group Neighbor Table Parameters For a full description of all the parameters displayed in the peer group neighbor table see Table 53 PTSE Table Parameters Peer Group Neighbor Table Section Example Enter 119477 The following information is displayed NeighbourPeerTable RemoteNodeld State PortCount 48a0 47 00000000003c00000000eeee 00c0da000001 ff Full 2 48a0 47 00000000003c000002000000 00c0da000004 ff Full iL 420 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Display Statistics Displays statistical information about network events that occur when the Information node is up Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI SHO Show PNNI information 7 8 STA Statistics Direct access sequence 119478 Command Result System action taken Statistical information is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Statistics Table Parameters For a full description of all the parameters displayed in the statistics table see Table 55 PTSE Table Parameters Statistics Section Example Enter 119478 The following information is displayed Level 72 gt
203. elan Add ELAN Add an ELAN to the LECS database that is add a new LES Specify the ELAN name and LES ATM address You can use any legal ELAN name The names of the ELANs ona particular switch all have the form elan_ lt xXXXX gt _ lt n gt where lt XXXX gt is a number unique to the switch and lt n gt is the sequential number of the ELAN between 0 and 15 This is the form to use for ELANs that you enter in this section If the requested LES ATM address already exists in the LECS database this command defines a new alias ELAN with the same LAN type and frame size If the LES ATM address does not match any ATM address in the LECS database a new ELAN is created with the LAN type and max frame size set to the default values Ethernet 1516 You can define up to 380 ELANs in the LECS database of a CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Each CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch LECS database has 16 default ELAN names and default ATM addresses corresponding to the LESs in the same switch Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 6 ANE Add new ELAN record Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 ATM Address 20 Hex bytes separated by dots Direct access sequence 2 1 5 6 parameters Command Result System action tak
204. em action taken The specific redundant ELAN information is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 215950 The following information is displayed ELAN name elanl ELAN status Operational FLAN state 2 PRIMARY State start time Sec Liz umber config requests O K g 0 umber config requests failed 0 PRIMARY LES Id 0 SECONDARY SLE Se elich sso 276 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Redundant ELANs Specific Parameters Table 36 describes the ELANs specific parameters Table 36 Redundant ELANs Specific Parameters Parameter Description ELAN name ELAN status ELAN State State start time Sec Number config requests O K Number config requests failed Primary LES Id Secondary LES Id The ELAN name The status of the ELAN This can be Operational The ELAN is operating normally New A newly created ELAN that has not yet been processed by the LECS Init A newly created ELAN that is in the process of becoming operational Old The ELAN is in the process of becoming inoperable The state of the ELAN This can be Primary Secondary In Check when the ELAN is in transient state or No LES The absolute time the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch was started in seconds The number of configuration requests for this ELAN that were okayed The number of configuration requests for this ELAN that were failed A req
205. en Displays the total number of LECS connections System message display Number of LECS connections is lt number gt Example Enter 2 1 8 1 The following message is displayed Number of LECS connections is 300 Update LECS Maximum Connection Number Sets the number of LECs the LECS database may contain Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Config Services 8 LCS LECS maximum connection number 2 LCS Set Maximum connection number Direct access sequence 2182 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Number of LECS 1 800 connections Command Result System action taken Sets the total number of LECS connections System message display Number of LECS connections is now lt number gt Example Enter 2 1 8 2 500 The following message is displayed Number of LECS connections is now 500 268 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION LAN Emulation Redundancy You can configure the LAN emulation redundancy facility as follows Assign Redundant LES to ELAN Deassign Redundant LES from ELAN M ake Primary LES Active Display Redundant ELANs General Information Display Redundant ELANSs Specific Information Display Redundant LES General Information Display Redundant LES Specific Information Assign Redundant LES to ELAN Assign a LES to be the redundant secondary LES of a specified ELAN in the LECS database Specify the
206. en The specified ELAN is added to the LECS database System message display New elan was added 260 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Example Enter 2 1 5 6 elan_73_9 47 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The console responds with the confirmation New elan was added LAN type 1 max frame size 1 Delete ELAN Delete an ELAN from the LECS database Specify the ELAN name Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 7 DEL Delete ELAN record Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 Direct access sequence 2 1 5 7 parameters Command Result System action taken The specified ELAN is deleted from the LECS database System message display Elan record was deleted Example Enter 2 1 5 7 elan_73_9 A confirmation message is displayed Elan record was deleted 262 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Configure Segment ID Configure a local segment ID for a token ring ELAN in the LECS database Specify the ELAN name Each token ring segment in a token ring network that uses source routing must be assigned a unique segment ID by the network administrator You assign the segment ID to the ATM ELAN which simulates the token ring by this command Then when a LEC joins the ELAN it gets the segm
207. enable disable 325 switch security status display 324 Switched Virtual Channel Connections SVCs 25 Switched Virtual Circuit 147 149 general 31 introduction 27 T technical support 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 439 3Com URL 439 bulletin board service 440 fax service 441 network suppliers 441 product repair 443 Telnet 28 30 temperature operating 421 terminal emulation 30 timers hello holddown 358 PTSE holddown 357 setting 356 setting to default values 373 topology database 405 link information 412 traffic flow statistics 189 Transcend Enterprise Manager TEM 28 30 38 TranscendWare management applications software 30 U UBR Unspecified Bit Rate 375 administrative weight 390 optimization parameter 381 updating admin access password 53 auto configuration status 115 maximum NNI hops 165 read access password 51 write access password 52 upgrading software files 91 URL 439 User Network Interface UNI 71 displaying signaling timers 183 general 31 V Virtual Channel Connection VCC control direct 144 control distribute 144 multicast forward 144 multicast send 144 Virtual Channel Identifier connection 147 149 in connection 144 out connection 144 PVC call 155 Virtual Path Identifier connection 147 149 in connection 144 out connection 144 PVC call 155 virtual terminal protocol 28 W World Wide Web WWW 439 write community string configuration displaying 66 write access password u
208. ent ID from the LECS Alternatively instead of using this command you can configure the segment ID manually in each individual LEC in the ELAN You cannot assign a segment ID to a non token ring ELAN Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 8 SEG Edit segment id C23 for TR only Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN name Up to 32 characters For more information see Add ELAN on page 259 Segment ID 1 4096 12 bit number Direct access sequence 2 1 5 8 parameters Command Result System action taken The segment ID is added to the LECS database System message display Segment id has been updated Example Enter 2 1 5 8 elan_73_9 133 The following message is displayed Segment id has been updated The segment ID is added to the LECS database LECS Database Statistics Show different statistics on the LECS database Command Actions Enter menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Config Service 6 LST LECS Statistics 216 Displays different statistics about the LECS System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example LECS Statistics Parameters Table 33 describes the LECS statistics parameters Table 33 LECS Statistics Parameters
209. ep Alive Maximum time between transmission of POLL PDUs when no SD or SDP PDUs are queued for transmission or are outstanding pending acknowledgment 186 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Table 25 SSCOP Timers continued SSCOP Timer Description No Response CC Maximum time between receipt of a STAT PDU in an active connection The connection control timer determines the time between transmission of BGN END or RS PDUs as long as an acknowledgment PDU has not been received For stability make the timer No Response greater than timer Keep Alive and make timer No Response greater than timer Poll Also make timer No Response and timer CC greater than the round trip delay SSCOP Configuration Parameters Table 26 shows the SSCOP Configuration Parameters displayed by the command Table 26 SSCOP Configuration Parameters SSCOP Parameter Description MaxCC M axPD MaxSTAT Window Maximum value for the state variable VT CC corresponding to the maximum number of transmissions of a BGN END or RS PDU Maximum acceptable value for the state variable VT PD before sending a POLL PDU and resetting VT PD to zero Maximum number of list elements permissible in a STAT PDU Sequence number of the first SD or SDP PDU not allowed by the receiver Example Enter 1 1 4 4 3 1 2 Signaling Timers The following information is displayed 1 9 are timers 10 13 are configuration parameters 1
210. er a parameter at the prompt Parameter flow detection protocols Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Format or Range 1 NONE 2 IP 3 IPX 4 IP IPX 2524 The flow detection protocols parameter is set Parameter changed successfully 240 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Set Initial Retry Time Sets the M PC p4 initial retry time parameter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 2 MPC MPOA Client Configuration 5 MP4 Set initial retry time Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter initial retry time Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Format or Range 1 300 seconds 2525 The initial retry time parameter is set Parameter changed successfully Set Retry Time Sets the MPC p5 retry time maximum parameter Maximum Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 2 MPC MPOA Client Configuration 6 MP5 Set retry time maximum Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range retry time maximum 10 300 seconds Direct access sequence 2 5 2 6 Command Result System action taken The retry time maximum parameter is set System message display Parameter changed successfully 242 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Set Hold Down Time
211. et Node Index 337 Get Node Administrative Status 338 Set Node Administrative Status to UP 339 Set Node Administrative Status to DOWN 340 Purge PNNI Database 341 Get Node Level 342 Set Node Level 343 Get ATM Address 344 Set Default ATM Address 345 Set ATM Address 346 Get Peer Group ID 348 Set Peer Group ID 349 Get Node ID 350 Set Default Node ID 351 Set Node ID 352 Get Node Name 354 Set Node Name 355 Get PGL Priority 356 Set PGL Priority 357 Setting the Timers 358 Set PTSE Holddown Timer 359 Set Hello Holddown Timer 360 Set Hello Interval 361 Set Hello Inactivity Factor 362 Set PTSE Refresh Interval 363 Set PTSE Lifetime Factor 364 Set Retransmit Interval 365 Set Peer Delayed ACK Interval 366 Set AvCR Proportional M ultiplier 367 Set AvCR Minimum Threshold 368 Set CDV Proportional Multiplier 369 Set CTD Proportional Multiplier 370 Set SVCC Initiation Time 371 Set SVCC Retry Time 372 Set SVCC Calling Integrity Time 373 Set SVCC Called Integrity Time 374 Set All Timers to Their Default Values 375 Setting Optimization Metrics 376 Get Optimization Metrics 377 Set Optimization for CBR 379 Set Optimization for RealTime VBR 380 Set Optimization for NonRealTime VBR 381 Set Optimization for ABR 382 Set Optimization for UBR 383 Set Optimization for All Classes to Default 384 Select Port for Interface Parameter Setting 385 Setting Interface Parameters 386 Set Aggregation Token 387 Set CBR Administrative Weight
212. eter is set System message display Parameter changed successfully Example Enter 2 5 1 5 100 The following message is displayed Parameter changed successfully 232 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Set Retry Time Maximum Sets the M PS p5 retry time maximum parameter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 1 MPS MPOA Server Configuration 6 MP5 Set retry time maximum Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter retry time maximum Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 2 5 1 6 200 Format or Range 10 300 seconds 2516 The retry time maximum parameter is set Parameter changed successfully The following message is displayed Parameter changed successfully Set Give Up Time Sets the M PS p6 give up time parameter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 1 MPS MPOA Server Configuration 7 MP6 Set give up time Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range give up time 5 300 seconds Direct access sequence 251 7 Command Result System action taken The give up time parameter is set System message display Parameter changed successfully Example Enter 2 5 1 7 250 The following message is displayed Parameter changed successfully 234 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING
213. etry time used by M POA retry mechanism maximum Minimum 10 sec default 40 sec maximum 300 sec M PS p6 MPS give up time Minimum time to wait before giving up on a pending resolution request Minimum 5 sec default 40 sec maximum 300 sec MPS p7 default holding time Default holding time used in NHRP resolution replies An egress M PS may use local information to determine a more appropriate Holding Time Minimum 1 minute default 20 minutes maximum 120 minutes 228 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Set Keep Alive Time Sets the M PS p1 keep alive time parameter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 1 MPS MPOA Server Configuration 2 MP1 Set keep alive tim Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range keep alive time 1 300 seconds Direct access sequence 2 5 1 2 Command Result System action taken The keep alive time parameter is set System message display Parameter changed successfully Example Enter 2 5 1 2 100 The following message is displayed Parameter changed successfully Set Keep Alive Sets the MPS p2 keep alive lifetime parameter Lifetime Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 1 MPS MPOA Server Configuration 3 MP2 Set keep alive lifetim Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range keep a
214. fier of the ATM address of the current node to the default ATM address value A change to the default ATM address takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration CHR Characteristics ADD ATM Address 3 2 2 SDF Set default ATM Address 2 Direct access sequence 11943322 Command Result System action taken The default ATM address is displayed System message display ESI 6 bytes of ATM ADDRESS was set to DEFAULT lt default address gt Example Enter 1 19 43 3 2 2 The following message is displayed ESI 6 bytes of ATM ADDRESS was set to DEFAULT 47 00 00 00 00 00 3C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 CO DA 60 27 F6 FF The last six bytes of the ATM address are set to their default values In the example for clarity the ESI of the ATM address is underlined 344 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set ATM Address b gt Updates the last six bytes ESI End System Identifier of the ATM address of the current node A change to the ATM address takes place after the next reboot For more information on ATM addressing in PNNI see ATM Address Format on page 196 in the Operations Guide There are several PNNI operations in the LM A that can only be performed when the node administrative status is set to DOWN and that
215. figuration 66 documentation CoreBuilder 9000 21 DTL cache state displaying 399 updating 400 E EFCI site marking 28 ELAN emulated LAN add 259 ATM address 256 ATM address adding 258 ATM address deleting 257 delete 261 display 249 general information 273 join privilege 314 315 LES BUS address 282 maximum frame size 251 285 name 285 parameters 250 parameters in LECS database 250 251 parameters in LES database 286 point to multipoint call id 285 point to multipoint connection 285 redundant 273 275 reset 311 response policies 289 response policy 288 290 security list 316 specific information 275 type 251 285 ELAN MAC address deleting 254 displaying 253 electromagnetic compatibility 31 electrostatic discharge safety information 34 enabling auto discovery status 117 Enterprise Management Engine Quick Start Guide for the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Switch 38 environmental specifications 421 operating humidity 421 operating temperature 421 storage humidity 421 storage temperature 421 ESD safety information 34 ESI End System Identifier default ATM address 343 updating 344 Ethernet encapsulation type displaying 68 Ethernet protocols 31 external clock source setting 108 109 F fax service 3Com Facts 441 features CoreBuilder 9000 30 flow control 28 EFCI site marking 28 PPD 29 G gateway configuration displaying 60 get node administrative status 336 get node ID 348 get node index 335 get no
216. ge device is attached to the port it frequently has limits on the VPI VCI channels it can handle you must set the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch port to match these limits You can set these parameters independently for each port Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup SIG Signaling Setup VCC VPI VCI range setup 1 GET Get VPI VCI range 1 4 3 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all ports Direct access sequence 1 1 4 3 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The current VPI VCI Configuration Parameters for the specified port are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example 168 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Example Enter 1 1431 3 1 2 The following information is displayed for an OC 3c port Rore e ah zee al Current Min VPI 0 0 Flash Min VPI 0 0 Current Max VPI q 7 Flash Max VPI 7 7 Current Mase WiC Ans 32 22 Plash MIN VOI 32 SZ Current Max VCI Sulla kak Flash Max VCI Sule lk ak The following information is displayed for an OC 12c port Porte PRAMAS es Beal Cumnent Min VET 0 0 Flash Min VPI 0 0 Current Max VPI 7 T Flash Max VPI 7 7 Current Min VCI B2 SZ hearse Marnive Gila B2 32 Current Max VCI 1023 T023 Flash Max VCI ola Saleh Updat
217. gorithms that determine significant changes for AvCR parameters expressed as a percentage A change to the AvCR proportional multiplier percentage takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration TIM Timers 9 APM AvCR Proportional Multiplier Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range percentage 1 99 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 9 parameters Command Result System action taken The AVCR proportional multiplier is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 1 9434915 The following message is displayed Default Value is 50 new value is 15 Press ENTER to continue 366 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set AVCR Minimum Threshold Sets the AVCR minimum threshold percentage The AvCR minimum threshold percentage is the minimum percentage change in bandwidth after which a node will inform its neighbors of a significant change via a PTSE For more information on PTSE regeneration see PTSE on page 190 in the Operations Guide A change to the AvCR minimum threshold percentage value takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9
218. he LECS based LANE redundancy facility in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch For more information see Redundant LANE Services on page 137 in the Operations Guide Command Actions SYS Platform config SET Switch setup SLE LE setup RDN LE Service redundancy setup 2 LRM Change LE Service redundancy Mode Enter menu sequence 1 1 5 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Enable disable o to disable 1 to enable Direct access sequence 1 1 5 4 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The LECS based LANE redundancy facility in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch is enabled or disabled System message display Redundancy mode changed Example Enter 1 15420 The following message is displayed Redundancy mode changed The LECS based LANE redundancy facility in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch is disabled Update Startup Delay Update the startup delay parameter for LANE redundancy facility in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The startup delay is the time elapsed between the switch startup and the startup of the LANE redundancy facility To display the current value of the parameter see Display LE Service Redundancy on page 221 This parameter is in the range 1 15 minutes and defaults to 10 minutes For more information about the startup delay see LANE Redundancy Start up Delay
219. he LECS database statistics are displayed LEESmsitatuts balesr total LECS clients no 0 Max LECS clients no 300 total Reject Requests 0 total Config Req responded with OK 0 total Config Req responded with ERR 0 Press ENTER to continue or x ENTER to exit OPERATION TX RX CONNEC 0 0 SERUP 0 0 RELEASE 0 0 ADD PARTY 0 0 ADD PARTY ACK 0 0 ADD PARTY REJ 0 0 DROP PARTY 0 0 Reset LECS Release configuration of direct VCCs that were used in the configuration phase of a LEC and are no longer needed Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 7 RST Reset LECS Direct access sequence 2 1 7 Command Result System action taken The LECS is reset System message display LECS is reset Example Enter 2 17 The following prompt is displayed Are you sure Y N Y Enter y to confirm or n to cancel The following message is displayed LECS is reset 266 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Display LECS Maximum Connection Number Shows how many LECs the LECS database may contain Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Config Service 8 LCS LECS maximum connection number 1 LCG Get LECS Maximum connection number Direct access sequence 2 1 8 1 Command Result System action tak
220. he full RS 232 serial port software download procedure Table 12 describes the load modes that can be requested by the command Table 12 Load Modes Load Mode Description Load Prepares the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch for the software download via the RS 232 port After the reboot the Switch changes to the waiting state for the download utilities via RS 232 Operational Returns the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch to run after any reboot Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 3 LOA Load System Software 3 LCL Prepare for Local RS232 Download Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Load mode 1 Load Mode 0 Operational Mode Direct access sequence 1 3 3 parameters Command Result System action taken System is ready for RS 232 software download System message display Will be ready for software loading via LMA port on the next reboot Example Enter 1 3 3 1 The following message is displayed Will be ready for software loading via LMA port on the next reboot The system software will be loaded from the LMA port upon reboot Downloading System Software 83 Upload Configuration Upload the Switch configuration LANE or LANE database configuration or PNNI configuration from the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch to an external host Specify the server IP address and the target configuration file name Command Actions Entert
221. he menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 3 LOA Load System Software 4 TCU Perform TFTP Configuration Upload Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Configuration type 1 Switch Configuration 2 LANE Configuration 3 LANE Security Database 4 PNNI Configuration Server IP address Valid IP address Configuration filename Name of the target configuration file Direct access sequence 1 3 4 parameters Command Results System action taken The configuration is uploaded to the external host System message display Upload process started Example Enter 1 3 4 1 151 104 21 147 cfgtest cfg The following prompt is displayed Start upload to 151 104 21 147 cfgtest cfg Y N y The following message is displayed Upload process started The configuration is uploaded to the host 84 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Download Switch LANE PNNI Configuration Download the Switch configuration LANE or LANE database configuration or PNNI configuration from an external host to the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Specify the server IP address and the configuration file name After the configuration has been downloaded the following operations are performed automatically The standby in service switch if it exists changes to be the standby suspend switch The active switch is reset Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 3 LOA Load Syste
222. ics Y Physical Layer ET Get physical layer counters r Range lt slot group port gt parameters The following information is displayed SONET section level BIP errors i BIE 0 SONET line level BIP errors B2 0 SONET path level BIP errors B3 0 SONET loss of signal state LOS ON SONET loss of frame state LOF OFF SONET loss of pointer state LOP OFF SONET out of cell delineation state OCD ON SONET line alarm indication signal state Line AIS ON SONET path alarm indication signal state Path AIS OFF SONET line remote defect indication state Line RDI OFF SONET path remote defect indication state Path RDI ON Table 27 Physical Layer Statistics Statistic Physical Layer Statistics 191 Description SONET section level BIP errors B1 SONET section level BIP errors B2 SONET section level BIP errors B3 SONET loss of signal state LOS SONET loss of frame state LOF SONET loss of pointer state LOP SONET out of cell delineation state OCD SONET path alarm indication signal state Path AIS SONET line alarm indication signal state Line AIS SONET line remote defect indication state Line RDI SONET path remote defect indication state Path RDI Section BIP 8 bit interleaved parity code 8 even parity for error monitoring Line BIP 8 line error monitoring Path BIP 8 path error monitoring Loss of signal
223. icy as follows Display ELAN Response Policy Update ELAN Response Policy Display LE_ARP Response Policy Update LE_ARP Response Policy Update LE_ARP Response Policy for Route Descriptor Reset LES Configurations Display LANE Multicast Forward Delay Update LANE Multicast Forward Delay E E E E m Display LE_ARP Response Policy for Route Descriptor E E E E Display the ELAN s response policy The ELAN response policy pertains to the possible recipients of a response from a LES to an LE_ARP request by a LEC See Table 41 for the possible response policies Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Service 3 ELN ELANs Info 1 LSU LES Setup 2 GRE Get response policy Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter ELAN ID Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Format or Range For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 2 2 3 1 2 parameters The response policy for the specified ELAN is displayed Response policy is Example Enter 2 2312 2 The response policy of the ELAN with ELAN ID 2 is displayed as follows Response policy is DIRECT VCC ELAN Response Policies Table 41 describes the ELAN response policies Table 41 ELAN Response Policies Name Description DIRECT VCC The LES sends the response to the requesting LEC o
224. ier see the following section on how to contact 3Com Support from 3Com If you are unable to obtain assistance from the 3Com online technical resources or from your network supplier 3Com offers technical telephone support services To find out more about your support options call the 3Com technical telephone support phone number at the location nearest you 442 APPENDIX C TECHNICAL SUPPORT When you contact 3Com for assistance have the following information ready m Product model name part number and serial number A list of system hardware and software including revision levels E m Diagnostic error messages E Details about recent configuration changes if applicable Here is a list of worldwide technical telephone support numbers Country Telephone Number Country Telephone Number Asia Pacific Rim Australia 1 800 678 515 P R of China 10800 61 00137 or Hong Kong 800 933 486 021 6350 1590 India 61 2 9937 5085 Singapore 800 6161 463 Indonesia 001 800 61 009 S Korea Japan 0031 61 6439 From anywhere in S Korea 00798 611 2230 M alaysia 1800 801 777 From Seoul 0 2 3455 6455 New Zealand 0800 446 398 Taiwan R O C 0080 611 261 Pakistan 61 2 9937 5085 Thailand 001 800 611 2000 Philippines 1235 61 266 2602 Europe From anywhere in Europe call 31 0 30 6029900 phone 31 0 30 6029999 fax Europe South Africa and Middle East From the following countries you may use the toll free numbers
225. iguration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration Enter menu sequence 1 1 9 4 3 5 OPT Optimization Metrics 2 SOP Set Optimization Metrics 2 ORV Optimization for RealTime VBR 5 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range constant bit rate 0 6 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 5 2 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The real time VBR optimization parameter is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 119435222 The following message is displayed Default Value is 3 opt_ctd New value is 2 opt_av_cr Press ENTER to continue The value of the RealTime VBR optimization parameter is updated Set Optimization for NonRealTime VBR Sets the Non Real Time Variable Bit Rate VBR optimization parameter A change to the NrtVBR optimization parameter takes place immediately Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration 1 9 4 3 5 OPT Optimization Metrics 2 SOP Set Optimization Metrics 3 ONV Optimization for NonRealTime VBR 5 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range constant bit rate 0 6 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 5 2 3 p
226. ing 1 Direct access sequence 11261 Command Result System action taken The current write community string is displayed System message display Current Write Community String Example Enter 1 1 2 6 1 The following message is displayed Current Write Community String private The current write community string is displayed Update Write Community String Setting Up for Management 67 Update the Write Community String of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch i gt The write community string is updated after the next reboot Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup G Management setup 6 SET Write Community String Setup 2 SET Set Write Community String Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Write community string alphanumeric string up to 18 characters normally set to public or private Direct access sequence 1 1 2 6 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The write community string is updated System message display Write Community String was successfully set for the next reboot Example Enter 1 1 2 6 2 private The following message is displayed Write Community String was successfully set for the next reboot The Write Community String is updated to private and takes effect after the next reboot 68 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Display Ethernet Encapsulation
227. ion Setup 1 GET Get Clock Source Status Direct access sequence 1 8 1 Command Result System action The current active clock source and current external clock port statuses are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 1 8 1 The clock source information is displayed Active Clock source is EXTERNAL Bxdvernall Clock sounce spo rig elas ale 25 4 active External Clock source port 2 is lt 5 1 2 gt standby 108 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Set External Clock Source 1 Set a port to be the first external clock source port If the port does not exist is disabled is in loop timing mode loopback or loop forward it cannot be used as an external clock source port Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 8 SCS Switch Clock Synchronization Setup 2 SP1 Set External Clock Source 1 Enter parameter at prompt Parameter Format or Range Clock source lt slot group port gt or None Direct access sequence 1 8 2 parameter Command Result System action The port is set to be the active clock source port System message display External clock source port 1 was successfully configured to port lt slot group port gt If the port has already been set to be the first or second clock source it is meaningless to set the port again In this case the command is ignored and the following
228. ion security status for the switch is displayed System message display Security on switch is ENABLED DISABLE iw Example Enter 2 3 3 1 The LEC admission security status for the switch is displayed as follows Security on switch is DISABLED Enable Disable Enables or disables the LEC admission security status for the switch for Switch Security the current session Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 3 SWS Switch security 2 SST Set switch security state Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Enable disable state 1 to enable 2 to disable Direct access sequence 2 3 3 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The LEC admission security status for the switch is enabled or disabled System message display Security on switch now ENABLED Any LEC currently in operational state will remain so unless it is restarted Example Enter 2 3 3 2 2 The new LEC admission security status for the switch is displayed as follows Security on switch now ENABLED Any LEC currently in operational state will remain so unless it is restarted 326 CHAPTER 10 LEC ELAN ADMISSION SECURITY Save Security Configuration Save Security Configuration The following commands allow you to save and restore the security lists for all ELANs in the switch For more inform
229. irect Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter Set keep alive time 2512 228 8 Set keep alive lifetime 2513 229 8 Set internetwork layer protocols 2514 230 8 Set initial retry time 2 545 231 8 Set retry time maximum 2516 232 8 Set give up time 2517 233 8 Set default holding time 2518 234 8 Display current configuration 2 5 24 235 8 Set shortcut setup frame count 2522 237 8 Set shortcut setup frame time 2 5 23 238 8 Set flow detection protocols 2524 239 8 Set initial retry time 2525 240 8 Set retry time maximum 2526 241 8 Set hold down time 2527 242 8 Connections Get UME addresses at port 311 124 4 Get static and NNI addresses at port 312 128 4 Get not active registered ATM addressesat 3 1 3 130 4 port Calls 3 21 140 6 UME addresses 331 145 6 Static addresses 332 148 6 Not active addresses 3 3 3 150 6 432 APPENDIX B MENU INDEX Table 64 M enu Index continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter PVC Operations Display VPI VCI limits 3411 151 6 Create full PVC call 3412 153 6 Create PVC call 3413 156 6 Create out VC in call 3414 157 6 Release PVC call 3415 158 6 Release out VC from call 3416 159 6 Display PVCs 3417 161 6 Delete all inactive PVCs 3418 162 6 Delete all PVCs of port 3419 163 6 Delete all ATM addresses of port 3 4 2 4 132 6 Add ATM address 3 422 133 6 Delete ATM address 3423 134 6 Get AT
230. is on do not touch any connections within the chassis with your fingers Do not insert metal objects into the backplane WARNING Do not plug in turn on or attempt to operate an obviously damaged module WARNING To ensure optical safety when you install the ATM Switch Fabric Module comply with this precaution Although the data communications LEDs and lasers that are used in this product meet the regulatory requirements for casual exposure to the eye as with any bright source of bright light 3Com recommends that you do not look into the light source Class One Laser LED Product Electrostatic Discharge ESD can damage components on the module ESD which occurs when the module is handled improperly can cause complete or intermittent failure CAUTION To prevent ESD related damage m Make sure that you are properly grounded Use a footstrap and a grounded mat or wear a grounded wrist strap ensuring that the strap makes good skin contact m Keep the module in its antistatic bag until you are ready to install it Handling Precautions Observe the following precautions when you handle the ATM Switch Fabric Module m Always handle the module by the front panel or as shown in the ATM Switch Fabric M odule Getting Started Guide m Do not touch the components pins leads or solder connections m Before you push the module into the chassis make sure that the module ejector handles are open m When you insert the mod
231. istics 199 AAL5 Layer Statistics Display AAL Layer Statistics You can display the following AAL5 layer statistics m Display AAL Layer Statistics m Reset AAL Layer Statistics For more information on AALS statistics see Traffic Statistics on page 117 in the Operations Guide Display AAL Layer statistics for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch AAL connections and SAR frame statistics are presented Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 4 STS Statistics 3 AAL AAL5 layer 1 GET Get AAL amp SAR counters Direct access sequence 4 3 1 Command Result System action taken The total number of AAL connections and SAR frames at the switch are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example 200 CHAPTER 8 VIEWING STATISTICS Example Enter 4 3 1 The following information is displayed AAL COUNTERS Max connections EA SAR MEMORY S AE SDRAM size al SAR COUNTERS RX correct frames RX No Free Buffers RX CRC 32 ERR frames RX Zero Length ERR frames ERR 5316 Active connections SSRAM size 512Kb 8Mb RX Length E RX Timeout RX Oversize ic Gr amp TX correct frames RR frames ERR frames ERR frames 42 Ca G amp S Reset AAL Layer Statistics Reset the AAL Layer statistics for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Command Actions Enter th
232. kg al Current Min VPI 0 Flash Min VPI 0 Current Max VPI T Flash Max VPI J Current Min VCI 32 Eara NAMINA 32 Current Max VCI Byala Flash Max VCI Byala BOE B o gaal Current Min VPI 0 Flash Min VPI 0 Current Max VPI 7 Flash Max VPI 7 Current Min VCI BZ Flash Min VCI 32 Current Max VCI Sa Flash Max VCI alla Press ENTER to continue or Selina Bi Ree ORE KRR Create PVC Full Setup Create Permanent Virtual Channel PVC 153 Set up a PVC permanent virtual connection Requires all parameters for a PVC to be defined You must create a PVC for each port to port connection in your ATM network For more information see Permanent Virtual Channels on page 87 in the Operations Guide PVC creation is subject to the following restrictions m VPI VCI should be in accordance with the PVC VPI VCl limits For more information see Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 m Each call must have a unique port number VPI and VCI value 154 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM Addresses 1 PVC PVCs Setup 2 CRF Create full PVC call Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Call type Cell Loss Level Priority First port CLP First port number First port VPI First port VCI Second port CLP Second port number Second port VPI Second port V
233. l Calls in Switch 193 Display Counters Per Port 195 Display Counters Per VPI VCI 196 Reset Counters Per Port 197 Reset Counters Per VPI VVCI 198 AAL5 Layer Statistics 199 Display AAL Layer Statistics 199 Reset AAL Layer Statistics 201 AAL5 Control Frame Port Statistics 202 Display Control Frame Port Statistics 202 Reset Control Frame Port Statistics 204 Signaling Protocol Statistics 205 Display Signaling Protocol Statistics 205 Reset Signaling Counters 207 MANAGING LAN EMULATION LAN Emulation Setups 210 LAN Emulation Services Setup 210 Display LAN Emulation Services Status 211 Enable LAN Emulation Services 212 Disable LAN Emulation Services 213 Display LECS Status 214 Enable LECS 215 Disable LECS 216 LAN Emulation Redundancy Setup 217 Display LECS Redundancy 218 Add LECS to LECS Order Database 219 Delete LECS from LECS Order Database 220 Display LE Service Redundancy 221 Enable or Disable LE Servers Redundancy 222 Update Startup Delay 223 LANE Version of Switch 224 Get Switch LANE Version 224 Set Switch LANE Version 225 MPOA Devices Configuration 226 Display Current MPS Configuration 226 Set Keep Alive Time 228 Set Keep Alive Lifetime 229 Set Internetwork Layer Protocols 230 Set Initial Retry Time 231 Set Retry Time Maximum 232 Set Give Up Time 233 Set Default Holding Time 234 Display Current MPC Configuration 235 Set Shortcut Setup Frame Count 237 Set Shortcut Setup Frame Time 238 Set Flow Detection Protocols 239 Set
234. le Enter 1 8 3 5 1 2 The following prompt is displayed This operation will change the active clock source Do you really want to change it Y N Y The following message is displayed External clock source port 2 was successfully configured to port lt 5 1 2 gt Reset the clock source configuration to its default values Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 8 SCS Switch Clock Synchronization Setup 4 RST Set Clock Source to Internal Direct access sequence 1 8 4 Command Result System action The clock source configuration is reset to its default values System message display Clock Source configuration was set to default Example Enter 1 8 4 The following prompt is displayed Do you really want to reset config y n y The following message is displayed Clock Source configuration was set to default e e Peco MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES This chapter describes how you view and define network interfaces with the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch m ILMI Setup m ATM Addresses Port Table gm Network Prefix ILMI Setup You can configure the Interim Local Management Interface ILM I with the following options m Display ILM Version Update ILM I Version Display Auto configuration Status Update Auto configuration Status Display Auto discovery Status Update Auto discovery status Display LECS Access Options Update LEC LECS Communication
235. le 19 describes the parameters displayed by the command Table 19 Parameters Name Description Port Number ATM port number lt slot group port gt ATM address Network prefix of ATM address Network prefix 136 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Delete All Inactive Addresses Table 19 Parameters continued Name Description ATM address User part of ATM address User part Member number The member number provides a sequential numbering of ATM addresses registered at a port It is used to specify the connection Man Always set to YES Delete all ATM addresses that do not exist for the port but are currently present in flash memory These ports are not installed or failed Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM addresses 2 STP Static ATM Addresses Setup 5 DNA Delete all inactive addresses Direct access sequence 3425 Command Result System action taken All inactive ATM addresses are erased System message display Delete inactive addresses successfully Example Enter 3 4 2 5 The following prompt is displayed Delete all inactive addresses from flash Are you sure Y N Enter y to confirm The following message is displayed Delete inactive addresses successfully Netw ork Prefix Display Netw ork You can display the network prefix For more information about the use of Network Prefix see Hierarchic ATM
236. les of ports 11451 171 10 Set profile of port dd 4 52 173 10 Get protocol version 11453 174 6 Set protocol version 11454 176 6 Get call proceeding value I A AG l 177 6 Set call proceeding value 11462 178 6 Set signaling configuration to factory 1147 179 6 defaults LANE commands Show LE services status 1 15 12 211 8 Enable services 11512 212 8 Disable LE services 11513 213 8 Show LECS status Lod 52 T 214 8 Enable LECS services 11522 215 8 Disable and save LECS services 115 23 216 8 Get active LECS ATM addr 11524 105 8 Set active LECS ATM addr 11525 106 8 Display LECS ordered list 11531 218 8 Add to LECS ordered list 11532 219 8 Delete from LECS ordered list dd 5 3 3 220 8 Show LES redundancy params 11541 221 8 Change LE service redundancy mode 115 42 222 8 Set LE service redundancy startup delay 115 43 223 8 426 APPENDIX B MENU INDEX Table 64 M enu Index continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter Switch Network Prefix Setup Get network prefix 1161 137 5 ILMI Setup Get ILM I version 11811 112 4 Set amp save ILM I version 11812 113 4 Get auto configuration ON OFF status 11821 114 4 Set auto configuration ON OFF status 11822 115 4 Get auto discovery ON OFF status 11831 116 4 Set amp save auto discovery ON OFF status 11832 117 4 Get LECS via ILM ON OFF status 11841 118 4 Set LECS via ILM ON OFF status 11842 119 4 Get polling sta
237. licy 292 Update LE ARP Response Policy 293 Display LE_ARP Response Policy for Route Descriptor 295 Update LE_ARP Response Policy for Route Descriptor 297 Reset LES Configurations 298 10 11 Display LANE Multicast Forward Delay 299 Update LANE Multicast Forward Delay 300 LEC Operations 301 Display LEC Connection Info 301 Display LEC Address Info 304 LAN Emulation Statistics 306 Display LAN Emulation Statistics 306 Display LEC Statistics 308 Reset LAN Emulation Statistics 310 Display Multicast Addresses 311 Destroy Specific LEC 312 Restart ELAN 313 LEC ELAN ADMISSION SECURITY LEC Not in ELAN Security List 316 Display LEC ELAN Join Privilege 316 Update LEC ELAN Join Privilege for Current Session 317 LECs in ELAN Security List 318 Display LECs in ELAN Security List 318 Delete All LECs from Security List 320 Add All Joined LECs to Security List 321 Add a LEC to Security List 322 Change the Join Privilege of a LEC 323 Delete a LEC from the Security List 324 Perform a Security Check on a LEC 325 Switch Security 326 Display Switch Security Status 326 Enable Disable Switch Security 327 Save Security Configuration 328 Save Security Configuration 328 Restore Security Configuration 329 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Viewing the Current PNNI State 332 Display PNNI E IISP State 332 Configuring PNNI Nodes 333 Get Number of Nodes 334 Get Enhanced 164 Address Support State 335 Set amp Save Enhanced E 164 Address Support State 336 G
238. live lifetime 3 1000 seconds Direct access sequence 2 5 1 3 Command Result System action taken The keep alive lifetime parameter is set System message display Parameter changed successfully Example Enter 2 5 1 3 400 The following message is displayed Parameter changed successfully 230 Set Internetw ork Layer Protocols CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Sets the M PS p3 protocols parameter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 1 MPS MPOA Server Configuration 4 MP3 Set internetwork layer prots Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range internetw ork layer 1 NONE protocols 2 IP 3 IPX 4 IP IPX Direct access sequence 25 1 4 Command Result System action taken The internetwork layer protocols parameter is set System message display Parameter changed successfully Example Enter 2 5142 The following message is displayed Parameter changed successfully Set Initial Retry Time Sets the MPS p4 initial retry time parameter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 5 MPA MPOA Devices Configuration 1 MPS MPOA Server Configuration 5 MP4 Set initial retry time Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range initial retry time 1 300 seconds Direct access sequence 2 51 5 Command Result System action taken The initial retry time param
239. ll calls Direct access sequence 3 2 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The information for the specified call is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the examples 142 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Example Display all SVC Calls for an ATM address member Enter 3 2 1 11102 0 Information for all calls with ATM address member 11102 the second ATM address registered at port 1 1 1 are displayed Note that both calls with the ATM address member as input connection and output connection are displayed For the P2M calls all of the branches are shown Call Call Call Num Bei sine ona rt In Out Out Out number type State out VPI VCI conn conn COnN conn conn cons port mbr VPI VCI port mbr al eor r INKS Th i SO AYVOO00 Tait Ae S PIR Aa o Example Display Info for a Specific SVC Call Enter 3 2 1 11102 1321 The details of the call with Call number 1 and ATM address member 11102 are displayed Call number i Call type PVOP EZE Call state Active number of out connections iL Baresi ial L Calle 50 Time of last change of operational state 1177570 msec In connection VPI In connection VCI 200 In connection port elie Out connection VEI 5 Out connection VCI 202 Out connection port Ka ae Press ENTER to continue or x ENTER to exit Display Call Routing 143 Example Display all PVC Calls for a Port Enter 3
240. lot slot ID or for all slots for slot ID 0 are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the examples Configuring Interface M odules Interface Module Slot Occupancy Parameters 93 Table 14 describes the Interface M odule slot occupancy parameters displayed by the command Table 14 Slot ID Parameters Parameter Description Slot ID The slot ID number Slot Status The slot may be Free or Occupied Interface card type The card type is displayed Interface card status The port may be Up or Doesn t exist Example for the 16 slot chassis and 7 slot chassis Enter 1 5 10 Interface Module slot occupancy information for the 16 slot chassis is displayed as follows Sikoi satel Sy SSieonp Gal TSS Ese Oe errr OAN Slot status Interface card type Interface card status Occupied ATM I F card Eres pres Pres Occupied ATM I F card Up Pres Bree BLEE Bree Bree Eree Up Doesn t Doesn Doesn Doesn Doesn Doesn Doesn Doesn Doesn mrs Ge ae aes iar Yeu exist exist exist exist exist exist exist exist exist CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Interface Module slot occupancy information for the 7 slot chassis is displayed as follows Slot id Slot status Interface card type Interface card status al Occupied ATM I F card Up 2 Free Doesn t exist 3 Free Doesn t exis
241. ls inf rieurs et sup rieurs a gauche et a droite m Ne jamais forcer lorsque vous ins rez le module dans les rails Sicherheitsvorkehru Halten Sie beim Umgang mit M odulen des CoreBuilder 9000 Systems ngen unbedingt alle Sicherheitsvorkehrungen ein Lesen und befolgen Sie folgende Warnungen um elektrische Schlage Verbrennungen Brande oder Materialschaden zu vermeiden h WARNUNG Im CoreBuilder 9000 System existieren hohe elektrische Spannungen Sie sollten deshalb das ATM M odul nur mit auBerster Vorsicht installieren entfernen oder tauschen WARNUNG Das ATM M odul darf nur von ausgebildetem Servicepersonal installiert entfernt oder getauscht werden WARNUNG F hren Sie bei eingeschaltetem CoreBuilder 9000 System niemals M etallgegenst nde wie Schraubenzieher oder Schmuck an Fingern in offene M odulschlitze ein Ber hren Sie bei eingeschaltetem System keine Verbindungsstellen in Ger t mit H nden oder Fingern Setzen Sie keine M etallgegenst nde in die R ckwand ein WARNUNG Versuchen Sie nicht ein offensichtlich besch digtes M odul zu installieren oder in Betrieb zu setzen WARNUNG Halten Sie sich beim Installieren des ATM Schnittstellen M oduls zur Gew hrleistung des optischen Sicherheit an folgende Vorkehrung Obwohl die f r die Datenkommunikation verwendeten LEDs und Laser Dioden die Sicherheitsvorkehrungen f r zuf lligen Augenkontakt erf llen entsprechend wie bei anderen hellen Lichtquellen empfiehlt 3
242. lt join privilege can be Accept or Reject You need to save to flash to maintain this parameter after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 1 EDB Elan default behavior 2 SDF Set elan default behavior Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 See Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 Join Privilege 1 Accept 2 Reject Direct access sequence 2 3 1 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The ELAN join privilege for LECs which are not in the ELAN security list is changed for the current session System message display Default behavior changed successfully Any LEC currently in operational state will remain so unless it is restarted Example Enter 2 31211 The following message is displayed Default behavior changed successfully Any LEC currently in operational state will remain so unless it is restarted The default ELAN join privilege for LECs which are not in the ELAN security list is changed to Accept for the ELAN with ID 1 316 CHAPTER 10 LEC ELAN ADMISSION SECURITY LECs in ELAN Security List Display LECs in ELAN Security List The following commands let you configure the LEC admission security for LECs in an ELAN security list For more information LANE Security on page 145 in the Operations Guide Display LECs in EL
243. m technical education to maintenance and professional services This interactive tool contains technical product information compiled by 3Com expert technical engineers around the globe Located on the World Wide Web at http knowledgebase 3com com this service gives all 3Com customers and partners complementary round the clock access to technical information on most 3Com products 440 APPENDIX C TECHNICAL SUPPORT 3Com FTP Site i gt 3Com Bulletin Board Service Download drivers patches software and M IBs across the Internet from the 3Com public FTP site This service is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week To connect to the 3Com FIP site enter the following information into your FTP client m Hostname tp 3com com m Username anonymous m Password lt your Internet e mail address gt You do not need a user name and password with Web browser software such as Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer The 3Com BBS contains patches software and drivers for 3Com products This service is available through analog modem or digital modem ISDN 24 hours a day 7 days a week Access by Analog Modem To reach the service by modem set your modem to 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit Call the telephone number nearest you Country Data Rate Telephone Number Australia Up to 14 400 bps 61 2 9955 2073 Brazil Up to 28 800 bps 55115181 9666 France Upto 14 400 bps 3316986 6954 Germany Up to 28 800 bps 4989 6273
244. m Software 5 TCD Perform TFTP Configuration Download Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Configuration type 1 Switch Configuration 2 LANE Configuration 3 LANE Security Database 4 PNNI Configuration Server IP address Valid IP address Configuration file name Name of the source configuration file Direct access sequence 1 3 5 parameters Command Results System action taken The configuration is downloaded from the external host System message display Download process started Downloading System Software 85 Example Enter 1 3 5 The following message is displayed At the end of successful download of any configuration file the switch will be automatically rebooted No switch over to standby module if present will be performed Do you really want to continue y The following prompts are displayed Server IP address 151 104 21 147 Enter file name cfgtest cfg Start download from 151 104 21 147 cfgtest cfg Y N y The following message is displayed Download process started The configuration is downloaded to the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch 86 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Managing Switch Fabric Modules Display Switch Fabric Module Status You can display Switch Fabric Module information for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Display Switch Fabric M odule Status Reset Switch Reset Standby Switch Fabric Module Set Sta
245. me since Last Active Msg Number of RESET messages sent to LES Number of RESET messages rcvd to LES Reset LES Allowed Number of ELANs attached to LES The LES ATM address The LES connection state This can be Establish There is a connection between the LECS and the LES A connection is being established between the LECS and the LES There is no connection between the LECS and the LES The location of the LES This can be Internal or External Being Established No Connection Internal The LES is on the same switch as the LECS External The LES is not on the same switch as the LECS The Id of the LES on an Internal switch this is not relevant for an External switch location The number of current active clients as reported by the LES The time elapsed since the LES stopped being active in minutes The number of Reset messages sent to the LES by the LECS A Reset is attempted to solve split situations The number of Reset messages actually received by the LES from the LECS see above The number of Resets to the LES that are allowed relevant only for a shared LES The number of ELANs that are attached to the LES 280 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION LAN EMULATION SERVICE LES OPERATIONS LES Address Display LES BUS Addresses You can configure the LES address as follows m Display LES BUS Addresses m Update ELAN LES BUS Address Display LES ATM addresses for all 1
246. mer Resolution on page 98 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enter the menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 11411 Signaling Timers 181 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 4 SIG Signaling setup 1 RES Timer Resolution setup 1 GET Get Timer Resolution 11411 The current timer resolution for the signaling protocol timers is displayed in msecs Timer resolution msec lt n gt msec The following information is displayed Timer resolution msec 500msec 182 Update Protocol Timer Resolution CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Update the timer resolution of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The default timer resolution is 500 msec 0 5 secs the minimum timer resolution is 100 msec and there is no upper limit For more information see the previous section and see Timer Resolution on page 98 in the Operations Guide This command causes the new timer resolution to be activated in the current session The new value is stored in flash Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 4 SIG Signaling setup 1 RES Timer Resolution setup 2 SET Set Timer Resolution Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Timer Resolution in millisec Range gt 100 Direct access sequence 1 1 4 1 2 par
247. message is displayed Clock source 2 is already set to this port It is meaningless to set the two sources to the same port operation ignored Example Enter 1 8 2 5 1 2 The following message is displayed External clock source port 1 was successfully configured to port 5 1 2 Set External Clock Source 2 Setting Up the Switch Clock Source 109 Set a port to be the second external clock source port If the port does not exist is disabled is in loop timing mode loopback or loop forward it cannot be used as an external clock source port Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 8 SCS Switch Clock Synchronization Setup 3 SP2 Set External Clock Source 2 Enter parameter at prompt Parameter Format or Range Clock source lt slot group port gt or None Direct access sequence 1 8 3 parameter Command Result System action The port is set to be the active clock source port System message display External clock source port 2 was successfully configured to port lt slot group port gt If the port has already been set to be the first or second clock source it is meaningless to set the port again In this case the command is ignored and the following message is displayed Clock source 1 is already set to this port It is meaningless to set the two sources to the same port operation ignored 110 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Set Clock Source to Internal Examp
248. n name 248 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION LECS ELAN Database Operations You can configure the ELAN database as follows Display ELANs Display ELAN Parameters in LECS Database Update ELAN Parameters in LECS Database Display ELAN MAC Addresses Delete ELAN MAC Address Add ELAN MAC Address Display ELAN ATM Addresses Delete ELAN ATM Address Add ELAN ATM Address Add ELAN Delete ELAN Configure Segment ID LECS Database Statistics Reset LECS CAUTION Before you reboot the switch wait three minutes after each LECS update operation to allow the change to be stored in flash Display ELANs Display all the ELANs that are defined in the LECS database along with their LES addresses The active LESs are indicated Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS network topology 1 DAL Display all ELANs Direct access sequence 2151 Command Result System action taken The ELANs defined in the resident LECS are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example below Example Enter 2 151 The following information is displayed To scroll to the next displayable portion of the table press Enter to return to the LNT Menu press x then press Enter ELAN name LES address SEE US default AO O OT TT e0 a00 O Na 60 741 cl5 0 admin A O O OT e0 a00 T0 an EA cl5
249. n of the switch is displayed Lane version of switch is 2 0 Set Switch LANE Version ib Sets the LANE version of the switch If currently there are LECs joined in ELANs they remain joined and the version change affects only new LECs that join after the change After setting the LANE version reset the ELANs that have LECs connected to them This should be done very carefully reset the first ELAN wait until all the LECs have connected then reset the next ELAN and so on Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 4 LVR Lane Version of Switch 2 SLV Set switch lane version Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter LANE version Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Format or Range 1 for v1 0 2 for v2 0 The LANE version of the switch is changed Version has been changed successfully Currently joined v2 0 LECs remain as such 226 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION MPOA Devices The switch allows configuration of MPOA entities MPS and MPC The Configuration configuration is general so that all MPSs and M PCs that request configuration receive the same parameters Display Current MPS Displays all the current settings of the MPS variables Configuration Command Actions Enter menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 2 511
250. n page 183 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 3 CHR Characteristics LEV Level 1 1 GNL Get Node Level Direct access sequence 1194311 Command Result System action taken The node number and current node level are displayed System message display Node lt m gt of lt n gt Current Node Level ISE KX Example Enter 1 1943311 The following message is displayed Node 1 of 1 Current Node Level is 72 Set Node Level Updates the current node level The node level is the hierarchy level of the peer group to which it belongs For more information see Organizing a Network Hierarchy on page 183 in the Operations Guide A change to the node level takes place after the next reboot It is important not to split ELANs between groups when constructing the network hierarchy There are several PNNI operations in the LM A that can only be performed when the node administrative status is set to DOWN and that take effect immediately after the status is reset to UP These include updating the ATM address updating the PNNI node id and updating the node level For more information see Set Node Administrative Status to DOWN on page 338 Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI
251. nal connection with output port 1 1 4 and VPI VCI values of 1 60 which was added to the P2M connection with call number 1 is released Display PVCs Create Permanent Virtual Channel PVC 161 Display the PVCs for a specific port and call number Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM Addresses 1 Pvc PVCs Setup 7 GEP Display PVCs Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt Call number Call number or 0 for all calls Direct access sequence 3 4 1 7 parameters Command Result System action taken The PVC information is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 3 4 17 5 1 10 The following information is displayed See Table 23 for more information about the parameters shown Call Cadel Call Numa Pan Cal na eoa a Tr Out Out Out number type Slate out VPI VCI conn conn conn Conn conn cons port mbr VEL VC Deport mbr 2 PVC P2P Active ak ag N SLATO Seale al Gf S00 S25 162 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Delete All Inactive PVCs Delete all PVCs that are inactive A PVC that does not contain a card is inactive Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM Addresses 1 PVC PVCs Setup 8 DNA Delete All inactive PVCs Enter a parameter at the prompt P
252. nator Route Fail Count Originator RouteFail UnreachabeOriginator O amp eae 410 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Display PTSE Node Information Displays PTSE information for each node stored in the topology database Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI 7 SHO Show PNNI information 2 NOD Node PTSEs 4 Direct access sequence 11947 2 Command Result System action taken All PTSE information for each node stored in the database is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Node PTSE Table Parameters For a full description of all the parameters displayed in the node information table see Table 50 PTSE Table Parameters PTSE Section Example Enter 1 1947 2 The following information is displayed Level 72 gt Node 1 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c000000000000 00c0da600047 ff PTSE_Id Length Type Seq no CkSum Lifetime Description T 68 Si 2 95e6l SSVSO Nodal Inform 2 GZ Zee i 4dbe 35914 Horizont Link 3 92 Ae d 4dbb 35914 Horizont Link 4 Qe Arse il May OSG Horizont Link 34 76 224 2 cosel 359572 Int Reach Addr Node 2 Id 48a0 47 00000000003c00000000eeee 00c0da000001 ff PTSE_Id Length Type Seq no CkSum Lifetime Description al 68 Siy 2 OSE S AL Nodal Inform 2 92 200 1 4dbe 35861 Horizont Link 3
253. ndby Switch Fabric Module to Suspended In service M ode m m E m m Upgrade Software Files Display information about each of the switch fabric modules present If there are two switch fabric modules one is used for standby See the CoreBuilder 9000 Switch Fabric M odule Getting Started Guide for more information about standby Switch Fabric Modules Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 4 SWM Switch modules 1 DSS Display Switch status Direct access sequence 1 4 1 Command Result System action taken CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Switch Fabric Module information is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 1 4 1 ATM Switch Fabric M odule information is displayed Sukone ad Slot status Switch type Switch mode Memory size x 8 Occupied 22x22 ATM switch Active 64 MB Occupied 22x22 ATM switch TSEV SEBY 64 MB Switch MAC address Switch sys up time 00 cO da 7 92 29 0 day s OOs Sgi Managing Switch Fabric Modules 87 Switch Fabric Module Parameters Table 13 describes the switch fabric module parameters displayed by the command Table 13 Switch Fabric Module Parameters Name Description Slot ID Specifies the slot number in the chassis slots 8 or 9 The asterisks that appear before the Slot ID indicate to which Switch Fabric Module you are connected Slot Status Specifies whether or not the slot
254. nformation see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 Response policy 1 Reject 2 Forward Request For more information see Table 43 Direct access sequence 2 2 3 1 7 parameters Command Result System action taken The LE_ARP response policy for Route Descriptors in the specified ELAN is updated The update takes place immediately System message display Policy was successfully saved on flash Example Enter 2 231721 The following message is displayed Policy was successfully saved on flash The LE_ARP response policy for Route Descriptors of the ELAN with ELAN ID 2 is updated to Reject Reset LES Configurations Reset all LES configurations in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch to factory default values including LES BUS address ELAN response policy and LE_ARP response policies Command Actions LEM LAN Emulation Enter menu sequence 2 LES LE Services ELN ELANs Information LSU LES Setup 8 RES Reset Saved Configuration Direct access sequence 2 2 31 8 Command Result System action taken All LES configurations for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch are reset System message display Reset of saved configuration was done Example Enter 2 2318 The following prompt appear Do you really want to reset config y n y Reset of saved configuration was done The LES configurations of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise S
255. nly DISTRIB ALL The LES sends the response to all LECs in the ELAN 290 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Update ELAN Response Policy Update the response policy for an ELAN direct VCC or distributed connection The new response policy takes effect immediately This is a global setting for all the clients in that ELAN The factory default value is direct connection See Table 41 for the possible response policies Command Actions Enter menu sequence Emulation 2 Services ELN ELANs Information LSU LES Setup Set amp Save response policy Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter ELAN ID Response policy Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 2 231321 Format or Range 1 16 For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 1 Direct VCC 2 Distrib all 2 2 3 1 3 parameters The response policy for the specified ELAN is updated The update takes place immediately Response policy was set Response policy was successfully saved on flash The following messages are displayed Response policy was set Response policy was successfully saved on flash The response policy of the ELAN with ELAN ID 2 is updated to Direct VCC Display LE_ARP Response Policy Display the policy for handling LAN Emulation Address Resolution Protocol LE_ARP requests for a specifi
256. nnection active or not Specifies the administration status of the connection active or not 148 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Display Static Address Port Connection Table 21 Port SVC Connection Parameters continued Name Description Originator Specifies if the connection is originated at the calling UNI or the called UNI CLP Specifies the action which is to be performed on the CLP bit The possible values are clear bit 0 set bit 1 or no change N Display a connection relating to a specific VPI VCI of the port or all connections all VPI VCl of the port The connections involve virtual channels created between static addresses defined by LMA Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 3 CON Connections 3 PRT ATM ports 2 STC Static addresses Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Port number VPI VCI Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Format or Range lt slot group port gt Enter a VPI value or A for all VPI values Enter a VCI value ora for all VCI values 3 3 2 parameters The connection information for the specified port is displayed Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 3 3 2 3 1 2 149 Display Port Connections a 0 The following information is displayed Conn Gaull Port Member Conn Conn Oper Admin Originator CIP number number number number type VPI
257. nnectors interface 422 management 422 Constant Bit Rate CBR 375 administrative weight 386 optimization parameter 377 control direct VCC 144 control distribute VCC 144 control frame port statistics displaying 202 resetting 204 conventions notice icons About This Guide 16 text About This Guide 16 CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch 38 features 30 operation overview 25 CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Interface Module Getting Started Guide 38 CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Switch Chassis Quick Installation Guides 38 Enterprise Management Engine Quick Start Guide 38 counters per port displaying 195 resetting 197 counters per VPI VCI displaying 196 resetting 198 CTD proportional multiplier setting 368 D database topology 405 daughter cards card type 27 installing 38 device management 28 disabling auto discovery status 117 displaying auto configuration status 114 auto discovery status 116 call proceeding enable value 177 Ethernet encapsulation type 68 gateway configuration 60 ILMI channel polling interval 122 ILMI version 112 IP configuration 56 72 120 167 LECS access options 118 maximum NNI hops 164 network prefix 137 NMS configuration 58 protocol configuration 185 protocol timer resolution 180 QSAAL signaling timers 185 read community string configuration 64 signaling protocol profile 171 signaling protocol version 174 subnet mask configuration 62 UNI signaling timers 183 write community string con
258. nterface NNI connection E IISP This command also displays member IDs for each ATM address registered at the port Note that similar to ILM I registration each port can have multiple ATM addresses For more information see Display User Management Entities UM E ATM Addresses at Port on page 124 Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 1 ADD Get ATM Addresses 2 STC Get Static and NNI Addresses at Port Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all ports Direct access sequence 3 1 2 parameters Command Result System action taken All ATM addresses registered for the specified port are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 3 1 2 0 0 The following information is displayed Port number ATM address Network prefix ATM address user_part member man 5S in Aili AT Gy Ae lh A S SSe OMG Pig a Ge io PG number eg ig Wey HS TS eG SL Tg ty E OES Psy Ta Tey ES ES ERS alg ty ea CAA NHS Parameters Table 17 describes the parameters displayed by the command Table 17 Parameters Name Description Port number ATM address Network prefix ATM address User part Member ID Manual entry ATM port id Network prefix of ATM address User part of ATM address The member ID is made up of the port ID con
259. on ATM Address Member Out Connection VPI Out Connection VCI Out Connection Port Out Connection ATM Address M ember This is the unique number that identifies the call Whether the call is SVC or PVC and if it is a point to point or point to multipoint call When showing a connection of LAN Emulation point to point indicates use of the control direct VCC for LES or the multicast sent VCC for BUS When showing a connection of point to multipoint it indicates use of the control distribute VCC for LES or Multicast forward VCC for BUS Whether the call is active or not The number of output destinations that the call is routed to In a point to point call this is always one whereas in a point to multipoint call this number may be greater than one Whether the call cells are transferred through the Switch using the high priority queue or low priority queue The queue saturation level at which cells with their CLP bit set are discarded The possible values can be no discard at all 20 50 80 The Virtual Path Identifier VPI number of the input port The Virtual Channel Identifier VCI number of the input port The port number of the input port The ATM address member of the source If the source is not SVC this field does not appear The Virtual Path Identifier VPI number of the output port The Virtual Channel Identifier VCI number of the output port The port n
260. onfigure PNNI 1 NNO Number of Nodes 1 GNN Get Number of Nodes 119411 The number of PNNI nodes defined in the switch is displayed The number of PNNI nodes in switch is lt n gt The following message is displayed The number of PNNI nodes in switch is 1 Configuring PNNINodes 333 Get Enhanced 164 Displays the status of the E 164 enhanced 164 address support state Address Support ENABLED or DISABLED See ATM Address Format on page 196 in the State Operations Guide for more information on E 164 Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration ET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 2 EEA Enhanced E164 Address Support 1 GET Get Enhanced E 164 Address Support State Direct access sequence 119421 Command Result System action taken The status of the enhanced E 164 address support state is displayed System message display Enhanced E 164 Address Support is ENABLED DISABLED Example Enter 119421 The following message is displayed Enhanced E 164 Address Support is ENABLED 334 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set amp Save Enhanced E 164 Address Support State Updates the status of the enhanced E 164 address support state to ENABLED or DISABLED and saves it in flash memory A change to the status takes place after the next reboot See ATM Address Form
261. oot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration TIM Timers 6 PLT PTSE Lifetime Factor 4 3 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range lifetime factor 101 1000 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 6 parameters Command Result System action taken The Hello inactivity factor is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 1 9 4 3 4 6 150 The following message is displayed Default Value is 200 new value is 150 Press ENTER to continue Set Retransmit Interval Sets the retransmit interval The retransmit interval is the time after which unacknowledged PTSEs will be retransmitted A change to the retransmit interval takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration TIM Timers 7 RTI Retransmit Interval Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range interval 1 60000 seconds Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 7 parameters Command Result System action taken The retransmit interval is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new
262. otocol Timer Resolution You can configure the ILM signaling timers m Display Protocol Timer Resolution m Update Protocol Timer Resolution mw Display UNI Signaling Timers mw Display QSAAL Signaling Timers and Protocol Configuration For information about signaling timers see Signaling Timers on page 96 in the Operations Guide Display the current timer resolution in milliseconds for the signaling protocol timers Each signaling protocol comes with a set of timers one for each type of message in the protocol These timers determine when an expected response to a message is overdue They are set to the expected response time when the message is sent and decrement towards zero If they reach zero before the response is received the system is notified that the response is overdue All the timers in the Q93B and QSAAL protocol are based on a common timer tick length called the timer resolution When the timer resolution is changed all of the signaling timers are affected The CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch is shipped with a default timer resolution of 500 msec 0 5 secs To change the value of an individual timer change the timer resolution proportionally For example if you want to lower the no response timer from 50 secs to 25 secs reduce the timer resolution from 500 msec to 250 msec Then the no response timer together with all the other timers are reduced by one half For more information see Ti
263. ou configure the LEC ELAN admission security for LECs which are not in the ELAN security list For more information see LANE Security on page 145 in the Operations Guide m Display LEC ELAN Join Privilege m Update LEC ELAN Join Privilege for Current Session Displays the default ELAN join privilege for LECs which are not in the ELAN security list The default join privilege can be Accept or Reject To change the default join privilege Update LEC ELAN Join Privilege for Current Session on page 315 Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 3 SEC LE Security Configuration 1 EDB Elan default behavior 1 GDF Get elan default behavior Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 See Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 Direct access sequence 2 3 1 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The ELAN join privilege for LECs which are not in the ELAN security list is displayed System message display Default behavior is ACCEPT Example Enter 2 3111 The following message is displayed Default behavior is ACCEPT The ELAN join privilege for LECs which are not in the ELAN security list is displayed for the ELAN with ID 1 Update LEC ELAN Join Privilege for Current Session Updates the default ELAN join privilege for LECs which are not in the ELAN security list for the current session The defau
264. ow you to set the different interface parameters in the network Set Aggregation Token Set CBR Administrative Weight Set RtVBR Administrative Weight Set NrtVBR Administrative W eight Set ABR Administrative Weight Set UBR Administrative Weight Reset PNNI Interface Parameters to Default Values Reset All PNNI Interface Parameters to Default Values Set Aggregation Token Setting Interface Parameters 385 Sets the aggregation token The aggregation token is a number assigned to an outside link by the border nodes This option is currently not supported in this version Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI ICF Interface Configuration 2 IPR Interface Parameters 1 AGT Aggregation Token Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range aggregation token 1 2147483647 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 4 2 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The aggregation token is updated to its new value System message display Default value is 0 new value is set to lt n gt Example Enter 1 19 44241 50 The following message is displayed Default value is 0 new value is set to 50 Press ENTER to continue 386 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set CBR Administrative Weight Sets the CBR Administrative Weight parameter The CBR administrative weight is the administr
265. owing message is displayed Node 1 of 1 PNNI Node Administrative Status is set to DOWN The PNNI node administrative status is set to DOWN If the status of the PNNI node is set to DOWN and the switch is rebooted the status remains DOWN The PNNI node will only be operative after setting the administrative status to UP For details see Set Node Administrative Status to UP on page 337 Purge PNNI Database Clear the entire PNNI database All entries in the PNNI database will be deleted Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration 2 ADM Admin Status 4 PDB Purge whole PNNI Enter menu sequence 1 1 9 4 3 Database Direct access sequence 1194324 Command Result System action taken The PNNI database is cleared System message display Node lt m gt of lt n gt PNNI Database size lt XXXXXX gt was CLEARED Example Enter 1194324 The following prompt is displayed Node 1 of 1 Whole PNNI Database will be CLEARED Are you sure Y N The following message is displayed Node 1 of 1 PNNI Database size 1589876 was CLEARED 340 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Get Node Level Displays the current node level The node level is the hierarchy level of the peer group to which it belongs For more information see Organizing a Network Hierarchy o
266. own time 160 seconds 236 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION MPOA Client Configuration Parameters Table 30 describes the M POA Client configuration parameters Table 30 MPOA Client Configuration Parameters Variable Name Description MPC p1 MPC p2 M PC p3 MPC p4 MPC p5 M PC p6 shortcut setup frame time shortcut setup frame count flow detection protocols MPC initial retry time MPC retry time maximum hold down time If an MPC forwards at least MPC p2 frames to the same target within any period M PC p1 via the default forwarding path it should initiate the procedure to establish a shortcut The MPC p1 and MPC p2 parameters specify a default mechanism for automatically detecting flows in the absence of other information Other mechanisms e g RSVP may be used in specific cases to override this default Minimum 1 sec default 1 sec maximum 60 sec See M PC p1 Minimum 1 sec default 10 sec maximum 65535 sec A set of protocols on which to perform flow detection Default Initial retry time used by the M POA retry mechanism Minimum 1 sec default 5sec maximum 300 sec Maximum retry time used by the MPOA retry mechanism Minimum 10 sec default 40 sec maximum 300 sec Minimum time to wait before reinitiating a failed resolution attempt This is usually set to a value greater than MPC p5 Minimum 30 sec default MPC p 4 maximum 120 se
267. page 251 After updating the parameters the ELAN is reset that is the control distribute channel to all LECs that are attached to the ELAN is disconnected Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 4 EFP LES Edit ELANs Parameters Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 ELAN type 1 Ethernet 2 Token ring 3 VLT Elan max frame size 1 1516 2 4544 Direct access sequence 2 2 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The parameters for the specified ELAN are updated The update takes place immediately System message display ELAN is reset ELAN Parameters 287 Example Enter 2 241411 The following message appears ELAN is reset The parameters of the ELAN with ID 14 are updated ELAN Parameters for a LES Table 40 describes the ELAN parameters that can be updated Table 40 ELAN Parameters for a LES Name Description ELAN Type The type of frames that the ELAN recognizes m 802 3 Ethernet type m 802 5 Token Ring type a VLT Max Frame Size LAN Type Frame Length Bytes Ethernet Fast Ethernet 1516 Token Ring 1516 4544 FDDI 4544 not typical 288 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION LE ARP Policy Configuration Display ELAN Response Policy You can configure the LE ARP pol
268. pdates the node peer group priority Currently the peer group priority is set to 0 and cannot be changed Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 3 CHR Characteristics 6 PRI PGL Priority 2 SPR Set PGL Priority Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 3 6 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The node peer group priority is displayed System message display Node lt x gt of lt y gt Node PGL Priority is 0 Example Enter 1 1 943362 The following message is displayed Node 1 of 1 Node PGL Priority is 0 356 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Setting the Timers The following commands allow you to set values for the different PNNI timers and intervals These parameters are part of the Quality of Service QoS metrics that are used in establishing a signal Set PTSE Holddown Timer Set Hello Holddown Timer Set Hello Interval Set Hello Inactivity Factor Set PTSE Refresh Interval Set PTSE Lifetime Factor Set Retransmit Interval Set Peer Delayed ACK Interval Set AvCR Proportional M ultiplier Set AVCR Minimum Threshold Set CDV Proportional Multiplier Set CTD Proportional M ultiplier Set SVCC Initiation Time Set SVCC Retry Time Set SVCC Calling Integrity Time Set SVCC Called Integrity Time Set All Timers to Their Default
269. pdating 52 458 INDEX 3Com Corporation LIMITED WARRANTY CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Fabric Module HARDWARE 3Com warrants this hardware product to be free from defects in workmanship and materials under normal use and service for the following length of time from the date of purchase from 3Com or its authorized reseller Network Interface Cards One 1 year Other hardware products One 1 year Spare Parts and Spares Kits 90 days 3Com s sole obligation under this express warranty shall be at 3Com s option and expense to repair the defective product or part deliver to Customer an equivalent product or part to replace the defective item or if neither of the two foregoing options is reasonably available 3Com may in its sole discretion refund to Customer the purchase price paid for the defective product All products that are replaced will become the property of 3Com Replacement products may be new or reconditioned 3Com warrants any replaced or repaired product or part for ninety 90 days from shipment or the remainder of the initial warranty period whichever is longer SOFTWARE 3Com warrants that each software program licensed from it will perform in substantial conformance to its program specifications for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of purchase from 3Com or its authorized reseller 3Com warrants the media containing software against failure during the warranty period No updates are provi
270. port gt Direct access sequence 4 5 2 parameters Command Result System action taken Signaling statistics are reset for the specified port System message display Reset Q93B statistics completed successfully Example Enter 4 5 2 1 1 1 The following message is displayed Reset Q93B statistics completed successfully The signaling statistics are reset for port lt 1 1 1 gt 208 CHAPTER 8 VIEWING STATISTICS e e ecco MANAGING LAN EMULATION This chapter describes how to configure LAN Emulation LANE in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch m LAN Emulation Setups a LAN Emulation Services Setup m LAN Emulation Redundancy Setup m LANE Version of Switch a MPOA Devices Configuration m LAN Emulation Configuration Service LECS Operations m LECS Address m LECS Search Policy ma LECS ELAN Database Operations a LAN Emulation Redundancy m LAN Emulation Service LES Operations m LES Address m ELAN Parameters a LE ARP Policy Configuration m LEC Operations 210 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION LAN EMULATION SETUPS LAN Emulation Services Setup You can set up the LAN Emulation services as follows Display LAN Emulation Services Status Enable LAN Emulation Services Disable LAN Emulation Services Display LECS Status Enable LECS Disable LECS CAUTION Before you reboot the Switch wait for one minute after each LECS update operation to allow the new parameter values to be stored in fla
271. prise Switch Version Switch Management software version 320 Interface Control Card 2 version WE SPAS Interface Control Card 5 version Valea DAMES C CHe7 3 6 169 9 3225s el Mime Ocal s2al LECS ATM Address Display LECS ATM Address You can display and update the LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS ATM address m Display LECS ATM Address m Update LECS ATM Address Display the ATM address of the LECS in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch unit Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup SLE LE Setup 2 LCS LECS Setup 1 5 4 GLA Get Active LECS ATM Addr Direct access sequence 11 5 2 4 Command Result System action The LECS ATM address is displayed System message display Active lecs atm addr lt address gt Example Enter 1 15 2 4 The following message is displayed Active lecs atm addr 47 00 00 00 00 00 3c 00 00 a 00 a0 3e 00 00 01 00 106 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Update LECS ATM Address Update the LECS ATM address in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS SET 1 Platform Configuration Switch Setup SLE Est T Setup 5 2 Enter parameter at prompt LCS LECS Setup 5 SLA Set Active LECS ATM Addr Parameter Format or Range ATM address
272. r products used by Customer in connection or combination with the 3Com product including hardware software and firmware accurately exchange date data with the 3Com product with the exception of those products identified at 3Com s Web site http www 3com com products yr2000 html as not meeting this standard If it appears that any product that is stated to meet this standard does not perform properly with regard to such date data on and after January 1 2000 and Customer notifies 3Com before the later of April 1 2000 or ninety 90 days after purchase of the product from 3Com or its authorized reseller 3Com shall at its option and expense provide a software update which would effect the proper performance of such product repair such product deliver to Customer an equivalent product to replace such product or if none of the foregoing is feasible refund to Customer the purchase price paid for such product Any software update or replaced or repaired product will carry a Year 2000 Warranty for ninety 90 days after purchase or until April 1 2000 whichever is later OBTAINING WARRANTY SERVICE Customer must contact a 3Com Corporate Service Center or an Authorized 3Com Service Center within the applicable warranty period to obtain warranty service authorization Dated proof of purchase from 3Com or its authorized reseller may be required Products returned to 3Com s Corporate Service Center must be pre authorized by 3Com with a Return
273. r PNNI 50 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Passw ord Setup AN You can set up the three levels of access passwords to the LMA or reset all passwords to their factory defaults CAUTION 3Com strongly recommends that you change passwords for security reasons Three access passwords are provided read access write access and admin access For normal administrative operation use the admin access password For more information on access levels see LM A Access Level on page 42 In the password setup submenu you have the following options m Update Read access Password m Update Write access Password m Update Admin access Password m Set Password to Factory Default Update Read access Passw ord b gt Password Setup 51 Update the read access password Enter the new password a second time To accept the default password press Enter Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 1 PAS Password Setup 1 REA Set Read access Password Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range New password 0 to 8 alphanumeric characters New password Enter the password exactly as you did before confirmation Direct access sequence 1 1 1 1 Command Result System action taken The read access password is updated System message display The password has been changed Example Enter 1 111 The following dialog is displayed Note that the passwords
274. ration 1 SET Switch Setup 2 MNG Management Setup 7 ETH Ethernet Type Setup 2 SET Set Ethernet Typ Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Ethernet encapsulation 1 fortype ETH type o for type LLC Direct access sequence 1 1 2 7 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The Ethernet encapsulation type is updated System message display Eth Type was successfully set for the next reboot Example Enter 1 12721 The following message is displayed Eth Type was successfully set for the next reboot The Ethernet encapsulation type is updated to ETH and takes effect after the next reboot 70 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Set Management Configuration to Factory Defaults Reset the management configuration to the factory defaults for the next reboot Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 2 MNG Management Setup 8 MNG Set management configuration to factory defaults Direct access sequence 11 2 8 Command Result System action taken The management configuration is set to the factory defaults System message display Management configuration for next reboot were set to defaults Example Enter 1 1 2 8 The following prompt is displayed Do you really want to reset config y n y The following message is displayed Management configuration for next reboot were
275. re information on virtual channel connections see Virtual Channels on page 84 in the Operations Guide A change to the SVCC initiation time takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 4 TIM Timers 13 SIT SVCC Initiation Time 3 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range initiation time 1 60000 seconds Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 13 parameters Command Result System action taken The SVCC initiation time is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt New value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 19 4 3 4 13 20 The following message is displayed Default Value is 4 new value is 20 Press ENTER to continue 370 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set SVCC Retry Time Sets the SVCC Switch Virtual Channel Connection retry time The SVCC retry time is the time that the specified node will delay after a viable SVCC based RCC is unexpectedly taken down before attempting to reestablish it A change to the SVCC retry time takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 4 TIM Timers
276. registered by that client Number of messages sent by that client Number of LEC join requests rejected by the ELAN Number of LE_ARP requests that were sent by the LEC and forwarded to all clients in the ELAN Number of LE_ARP responses sent by the ELAN 308 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Reset LAN Emulation Statistics Reset general LAN Emulation statistics for a specified ELAN to zero Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services ELN ELANs Information 3 4 STS Statistics 3 RES Reset General LE Statistics Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 Direct access sequence 2 2 3 4 3 parameters Command Result System action taken LES and BUS statistics for the specified ELAN are reset System message display Example Enter 2 2 3 4 3 2 LES and BUS statistics for the ELAN with ELAN ID 2 are reset Display Multicast Addresses Displays multicast addresses registered by the LECs Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 3 ELN ELANs Information 5 MCT Multicast addresses Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 mcast address 6 hex b
277. rs are reset to UNI for all ports Resetting All Parameters 77 Resetting All You can reset all parameters or all parameters except IP for the Parameters CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch m Reset All m Reset All Except IP Addresses Reset All Reset all configuration parameters for the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch to their factory default settings i gt The new settings become active only after the next reboot The standby switch will remain in Suspended mode while the reboot is being performed Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 2 FLS Flash setup 1 RES Reset Config to Defaults Direct access sequence 1 2 1 Command Result System action taken All configuration parameters are reset to their factory default values System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 1 2 1 The following messages are displayed Do The new settings will become active after system reboot Note It is suggested not to leave the system running for a long time after reset to factory defaults as it may become unstable Reset of all saved configuration was done Standby switch will remain in Suspended mode while reboot is performed This will reset and reboot the device Are you sure Y N y you really want to reset config y n y All configuration parameters are reset to their factory values 78 CHAPTER 5 CO
278. rthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 3 NNI NNI setup 2 SMD NNI Set maximum number hops Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Number of hops 0 120 Direct access sequence 1 1 3 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The maximum number of hops permissible for NNI routing is displayed System message display NNI max hops was set Example Enter 1 132 9 The following message appears NNI max hops was set The Maximum NNI Hops parameter is updated to 9 166 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Signaling Setup The following commands allow you to configure the ILM I signaling parameters Display VPI VCI Range Update VPI VCI Range Display Signaling Protocol Profile Update Signaling Protocol Profile m m m m m Display Signaling Protocol Version m Update Signaling Protocol Version a Display Call Proceeding Enable Value m Update Call Proceeding Enable Value m Reset Signaling Configuration For information about signaling setup see Signaling External Links on page 88 in the Operations Guide Display VPI VCI Range Signaling Setup 167 Display the current signaling protocol VPI VCI configuration parameters for a specified port Maximum and minimum VPI VCI values are displayed for each port These parameters are set to match the VPI VCI capabilities of the device attached to the specified port If an end station or ed
279. s Command Result System action taken The Hello holddown timer values is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 1 943435 The following message is displayed Default Value is 15 15 sec new value is 5 Press ENTER to continue 360 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set Hello Inactivity Factor Sets the Hello inactivity factor The Hello inactivity factor is the amount of time expressed in Hello intervals after which the sending node will consider a link to its neighbor down if the neighbor does not respond For more information on Hello intervals see Set Hello Interval on page 359 A change to the Hello inactivity factor takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration TIM Timers 4 INF Hello Inactivity Factor 4 3 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range interval 1 100 Hello intervals Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The Hello inactivity factor is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 19 434410 The following message is displayed Defa
280. s Direct access sequence 4 2 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The statistics counter for cells through a port is reset System message display Reset ATM counters completed successfully Example Enter 4 2 41 1 1 The following message is displayed Reset ATM counters completed successfully ATM Counters for the specified port are reset to 0 198 CHAPTER 8 VIEWING STATISTICS Reset Counters Per VPI VCI Resets the statistics counter for total cells through a connection For more information see ATM Layer Statistics on page 193 Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 4 STS Statistics 2 ATM ATM layer 5 RVP Reset counters per vpi vci Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt VPI Perform menu item 3 CON 2 RTG 1 CLL to get the VPI VCI values for a call or enter A for all values VCI Perform menu item 3 CON 2 RTG 1 CLL to get the VPI VCI values for a call or enter A for all values Direct access sequence 4 2 5 parameters Command Result System action taken The statistics counter for cells through a connection is reset System message display Reset VPI VCI counters completed successfully Example Enter 4 25 1 1 laa The following messages are displayed Reset all VPI VCI counters may take a few seconds Reset VPI VCI counters completed successfully The counters are reset AAL5 Layer Stat
281. s 211 212 213 statistics 304 311 LANE multicast forward delay displaying 298 updating 299 LANE redundancy startup delay 223 LE servers redundancy enabling disabling 222 LE ARP policies for route descriptor 295 response policy 291 292 response policy for route descriptor 294 296 verification policies 292 LEC LAN Emulation Client add a party 301 adding to security list 320 address info 302 connection information 300 ID number 301 join state 301 operational state 301 registered ATM addresses 307 registered MAC addresses 307 state 301 statistics 306 307 308 LECS database 249 database statistics 263 disabling 216 enabling 215 resetting 265 search policy 246 status 214 LECS access options displaying 118 LECS ATM address displaying 105 LECS order database adding LECS 219 displaying 218 LEDs interface 422 management 422 LES configurations reset 297 general information 277 redundancy 221 redundancy parameters 221 redundant 277 278 specific information 278 statistics 304 LES BUS addresses display 280 low priority queue cell transfer 144 PVC call 155 INDEX 453 M major characteristics 421 management LEDs 422 Management Information Base M IB MIBs supported 31 maximum connection number displaying 266 updating 267 maximum NNI hops displaying 164 updating 165 maximum number of routes per cache displaying 403 setting 404 media type 94 menus access to submenus 46 key functions
282. s its signaling protocol A procedure for discarding cells related to one user frame to minimize the impact of congestion A set of logical nodes which are grouped for purposes of creating a routing hierarchy PTSEs are exchanged among all members of the group A node which has been elected to perform some of the functions associated with a logical group node Any connection between two nodes in the lowest level hierarchy VCCs used for the exchange of PNNI routing protocol messages Private Network to Network Interface A routing information protocol that enables extremely scalable full function dynamic multi vendor ATM switches to be integrated in the same network LEDs that indicate the status of each ATM port The serial link handles the parallel to serial conversion for data transmission over the backplane LEDs that pinpoint the stage of the software execution at which the failure occurred LEDs that light up in a binary pattern when a software error occurs A mechanism for preventing congestion or other traffic flow problems in a network by means of performing a set of actions for managing the traffic The interface defined as a set of protocols and traffic characteristics between the CPE user and the ATM network ATM switch 448 GLOSSARY VCI Virtual Channel Identifier Part of the identifier of a particular virtual circuit in the ATM fabric VPI Virtual Path Identifier Part of the identifier of a par
283. s place immediately Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 3 CHR Characteristics 5 NAM Node Name 2 SNA Set Node Name 3 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range PNNI node name Up to 30 alphanumeric characters Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 3 5 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The name of the current PNNI node is updated System message display Node Name was SET to lt name gt Example Enter 1 1 9 4 3 3 5 2 3Com World The following message is displayed Node Name was SET to 3Com World The name of the node is updated to 3Com World 354 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Get PGL Priority Displays the node peer group leader priority Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration CHR Characteristics 6 PRI PGL Priority 1 GPR Get PGL Priority 1 9 4 3 3 Direct access sequence 11943361 Command Result System action taken The node peer group leader priority is displayed System message display Node lt x gt of lt y gt Node PGL Priority is 0 Example Enter 11943361 The following message is displayed Node 1 of 1 Node PGL Priority is 0 Set PGL Priority U
284. se System message display Redundant LECS deleted Example Enter 1 15 3 32 The following message appears Redundant LECS deleted The LECS with index 2 is removed from the LECS order database Display LE Service Redundancy Display parameters of the LES redundancy facility in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch For more information see LAN Emulation Redundancy on page 136 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform config 1 SET Switch setup 5 SLE LE setup 4 RDN LE Service redundancy setup 1 DLR Show LES redundancy params Direct access sequence 11541 Command Result System action taken The LES redundancy parameters are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 11541 The following information is displayed LANE Service redundancy mechanism Enabled Startup Delay Sec 600 LES Redundancy Parameters Table 28 shows the LES Redundancy Parameters displayed by the command Table 28 LES Redundancy Parameters Name Description LANE Service Redundancy Status Whether LANE service redundancy is enabled or disabled Startup Delay Time elapsed between switch startup and startup of LANE redundancy facility in seconds Default is 600 222 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Enable or Disable LE Servers Redundancy Enable and disable t
285. section You can display a submenu or execute a command directly without having to step down through the hierarchy as in the previous example At the Main Menu prompt type the required sequence of menu item numbers or menu item mnemonic followed by the command parameters all on one line separated by spacebar strokes For example to display the password prompt directly from the Main Menu just enter1 1 1 1 atthe Main Menu prompt Entering Multiple Parameters Quick Key Functions The LMA Menu System 47 When a command has more than one parameter you can enter them all on the same command line with blanks in between or you can enter some or all of them on separate command lines If you do not enter them all on one line you are repeatedly prompted for the remaining parameters If you enter an illegal character or string such as an out of range parameter the LMA display responds with an error message which is indicated by a three asterisk prefix The following quick key functions are available when you work with the management menus Table 9 lists functions for navigating in the menu system Table 10 lists aids for editing parameters Table 9 Menu Navigation Functions To go Type or Press To the Main Menu from any point To the previous menu Back and forth within the command line Left Right Arrows To the beginning of the command line Home To the end of the command line End Table 10 Editing Aids
286. set to defaults The Management Configuration is set to the factory defaults Setting the Port Network Connection Type 71 Setting the Port You can set the network connection type for a specified port or a group Netw ork of ports To do this you can use either the LMA or the integrated fast Connection Type setup If you want to use the fast setup see the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Interface M odule Getting Started Guide You can set the interface type to NNI UNI or PNNI m Display Network Connection Type Update Port Network Connection Type Reset NNI Configuration Reset All Reset All Except IP Addresses PNNI is a feature available only in the extended software version For details on obtaining the extended version contact your 3Com representative 72 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Display Netw ork Connection Type Display the network connection type for each port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The network connection type may be Enhanced Interim InterSwitch Protocol E IISP User to Network Interface UNI or Interim InterSwitch Protocol IISP or Private Network to Network Interface PNNI Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 3 NNI NNI Setup 3 GIF NNI Get Interface Typ Direct access sequence 1 1 3 3 Command Result System action taken The interface type for each port of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch is display
287. sh Display LAN Display the status of the LAN Emulation services in the CoreBuilder 9000 Emulation Services ATM Enterprise Switch The status is either enabled or disabled Status Command Actions SYS Platform config SET Switch setup setup Enter menu sequence 1 wn to T H LES LE services setup 1 STA Show LE services status Direct access sequence 11511 Command Result System action taken The LE services status is displayed System message display LE services status is lt ENABLED DISABLED gt Example Enter 1 1511 The following message is displayed LE services status is ENABLED 212 Enable LAN Emulation Services CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Enable the LAN Emulation services in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The enable takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Platform config Switch setup Ea T setup T Uv 4 services setup ELS Enable services Enter menu sequence 1 SYS 1 SET 5 SLE 1 L 2 Direct access sequence 11512 Command Result System action taken System message display LE services status will be the next Example Enter 1 151 2 The following message is displayed The LE services status is enabled after the next reboot ENABLED on reboot LE services status will be ENABLED on the
288. splay PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 for VPIMVCI limits Second port VCI See Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 for VPI VCI limits Direct access sequence 3 4 1 1 3 parameters Command Result System action taken A PVC with the required parameters is created System message display A new PVC was created with call number lt n gt Example Enter 3 4 1 3 p2p 5 1 1 0 37 5 1 2 0 381 The following message is displayed A new PVC was created with call number 9 Add PVC Destination b gt b gt Create Permanent Virtual Channel PVC 157 Create an additional destination connection branch for an existing point to multipoint PVC You can only create an additional destination if the existing PVC was predefined as a PLM PVC Enter the call number of the original PVC setup and the parameters output port number VPI VCI and CLP with the same permissible values Default values for Cell Loss Level Priority and Cell Loss Priority are used See Table 23 The same limits as full PVC call setup apply You cannot add an additional PVC destination to a P2P PVC Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM Addresses 1 Pvc PVCs Setup 4 CRO Create out VC in call Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Call number Integer Output port number lt slot group port gt Output port VPI See Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page
289. ss Network prefix of ATM address Network prefix ATM address User part of ATM address User part Member number The member number is made up of the port ID concatenated with or followed by a sequential number It provides a sequential numbering of ATM addresses registered at a port 132 Delete All ATM Addresses at Port b gt CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Delete the ATM addresses registered at the specified port including those registered by ILM I and those that were created manually through the LM A The addresses are deleted from the MIB at the port they are de registered When you delete addresses from a specific port any existing connections associated with them are not deleted Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM addresses 2 STP Static ATM Addresses Setup 1 DAD Delete all ATM Addresses of Port Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt or 0 0 for all ports Direct access sequence 3 4 2 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The ATM addresses at port are deleted System message display All ATM addresses for port lt x x x gt were deleted Example Enter 3 4 2 1 3 1 2 The following message is displayed All ATM addresses for port 3 1 2 were deleted Add ATM Address to Port Add an ATM address to the list of registered ATM addresses at a port Enter
290. t 4 Free Doesn t exist 5 Occupied ATM I F card Up 6 Free Doesn t exist 7 Free Doesn t exist Interface Card Parameters Table 15 describes the interface parameters displayed by the command for a specific slot ID Table 15 Interface Parameters Parameter Description Port ID Interface Type M edia Type Operational Status Port Status Frame M ode Clock Src Loop Mode The port number for each of the module s ports in the format slot group port The port interface type for example OC3 SC The type determines the interface including the type of connector The type of media used by the port for example coaxial cable multi mode fiber The port may be up or down up amp connect or doesn t exist Whether the port has been enabled or disabled by management Can be either enabled or disabled If a port is disabled the CoreBuilder 9000 cannot connect to the other side via this port The interface framing mode Can be SDH or SONET This may be normal Nrm or Loop timing Lpt Indicate the loopback state of the ATM interface module port May be None Loop Forward or Loop Back Example Enter 1 515 Configuring Interface M odules 95 Parameters of the ports of the selected ATM Interface Module in slot 5 are displayed in the following example The ATM Interface Module contains an OC 12c STM 4 card an OC 3c STM 1 card and a 155
291. tem action taken The auto configuration status for the specified port is displayed System message display Auto Configuration is lt ENABLED DISABLED gt Example Enter 1 1 8 2 1 3 1 2 The following message is displayed Auto Configuration is ENABLED Update Auto configuration Status ILMI Setup 115 Update the Auto configuration Status for the specified port in the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Enable the Auto configuration Status only if both ATM Switch Fabric M odules have an auto configuration capability For more information about auto configuration see Auto Configuration on page 62 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch Setup 8 IME ILMI Setup 2 AUC Auto Configuration Setup 2 SET Set Auto Configuration ON OFF Status Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt Auto configuration o to disable auto configuration enable disable 1 to enable auto configuration Direct access sequence 1 1 82 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The Auto configuration Status is updated for the selected port System message display Auto Configuration is set to lt ENABLED DISABLED gt Example Enter 1 1 8 2 2 3 1 2 1 The following message is displayed Auto Configuration is set to ENABLED The auto
292. ter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Confirm reboot yorn Direct access sequence 1 7 Command Result System action taken Reboots the ATM Enterprise Switch System message display Rebooting the system Example Enter 1 7 The following prompt is displayed Do you really want to reboot the system y n Enter y to confirm The following message is displayed Rebooting the system The reboot operation takes about 1 minute After reboot the login screen is displayed 102 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Configuration Flash Status Show status of the configuration flash When you change the configuration of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch the new configuration is stored in the configuration flash This command indicates when the new configuration has been successfully stored Before you power cycle turn off and on the Switch make sure that the configuration flash has been updated Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 6 FLS Configuration Flash Status Direct access sequence 1 6 Command Result System action taken Displays configuration flash status System message display Configuration flash is up to date Example Enter 1 6 The following message is displayed Configuration flash is up to date ATM Features and Software Versions 103 ATM Features and You can display the following ATM features and the software version Softw
293. th call number lt n gt was released Example Enter 3 4 1 5 10 The following message is displayed A PVC with call number 10 was released Release PVC Destination Create Permanent Virtual Channel PVC 159 Release a single destination connection branch from a point to multipoint call Specify the P2M call number and the output port number and VPI VCI of the destination connection Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM Addresses 1 Pvc PVCs Setup 6 REO Release Out VC from call Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Call number of the P2M Integer See Display Call Routed to ATM Address on connection page 140 to get a call number for a port Destination connection lt slot group port gt port number Destination connection See Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 for VPI VPI VCI limits Destination connection See Display PVC VPI VCI Limits on page 151 for VCI VPI VCI limits Direct access sequence 3 4 1 6 parameters Command Result System action taken A PVC call destination with parameters specified is released System message display A message is displayed as shown in the example 160 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Example Enter 3 416 11 1 4 1 60 The following message is displayed An Outgoing VC with call number dl VPI 1 VEIE 60 was released The additio
294. that are inserted into CoreBuilder 9000 chassis slots Each ATM Interface Module can accommodate two of the following daughter cards in any combination OC 3c STM 1 OC 12c STM 4 and 155 Mbps over UTP5 Processors CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Characteristics 27 The OC 3c STM 1 and OC 12c STM 4 daughter cards are available in single mode or multi mode An OC 3c STM 1 card is available with three single mode ports and one multi mode port You can install up to 11 ATM Interface M odules in the 16 slot chassis and up to 5 ATM Interface M odules in the 7 slot chassis and the 8 slot chassis You can order the ATM Interface Modules as a kit with daughter cards included or you can order individual daughter cards separately Table 5 lists the available configurations of the ATM Interface Module and the daughter cards along with their part numbers Table 5 Daughter Cards Compatible with the ATM Interface Carrier M odule Card Type 3Com Part Number OC 3c MMF1 3CBONAL4MC OC 3c SM F2 3CBONAL4SC OC 3c SM LR3 3CBONAL2SCLR OC 12c M MF 3CBONAKIMC OC 12c SMF 3CBONAK1SC 155 Mbps over UTP5 3CBONAL4R 1MMF M ulti M ode Fiber 2 SM F Single M ode Fiber 3 SM LR Single M ode Long Reach An on board i960 processor handles all advanced software features including SVC Switched Virtual Circuit signalling PNNI Private Network Node Interface and SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol management 28 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIE
295. the Signaling Protocol Parameters the next time that it reboots Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 4 SIG Signaling setup 5 SPS Signaling protocol configuration setup 2 SPR Set profile of port Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt Enter 0 0 for all ports Signaling profile o for user profile 1 for network profile Direct access sequence 1 1 4 5 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The signaling protocol profile is updated for the specified port System message display Parameter was successfully set Example Enter 1145 2 3 1 2 1 The following message is displayed This operation will release all SVC connections Are you sure Y N Enter y to confirm n to cancel The following message is displayed The profile was set successfully The signaling protocol for port 3 1 2 is updated to Network and saved 174 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Display Signaling Protocol Version Display the current signaling protocol version for the specified port It can be either version 3 0 or version 3 1 Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 4 SIG Signaling setup 5 SPS Signaling protocol configuration setup 3 GVP Get protocol version Direct access sequence 11 4 5 3 Command Result System action
296. the available Weight bit rate service category Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 4 ICF Interface Configuration IPR Interface Parameters 5 ABW ABR Admin Weight Entera parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ABR admin weight 1 2147483647 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 4 2 5 parameters Command Result System action taken The ABR admin weight parameter is updated to its new value System message display Default Value is 5040 New value is set to lt n gt Example Enter 1 19 4 4 2 5 19000 The following message is displayed Default value is 5040 new value is set to 19000 Press ENTER to continue 390 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set UBR Administrative Weight Sets the UBR Administrative Weight parameter The UBR administrative weight is the administrative weight of this interface port for the unspecified bit rate service category Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 4 ICF Interface Configuration 2 IPR Interface Parameters 6 UBW UBR Admin Weight Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range UBR admin weight 1 2147483647 Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 4 2 6 parameters Command Result System action taken The
297. the port number and ATM address Use this command for example with devices that do not support ILM I you must add ATM addresses manually to interface with such devices Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM addresses 2 STP Static ATM Addresses Setup 2 ADD Add ATM Address Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port ID lt slot group port gt ATM address 19 bytes When fewer end with Direct access sequence 3 4 2 2 parameters Command Result System action taken Specified ATM address is added to specified port System message display ATM address was successfully set Example Enter 3 4 2 2 5 1 2 47 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 b The following message is displayed ATM address was successfully set 134 CHAPTER 6 MANAGING NETWORK INTERFACES Delete ATM Address by Member ID b gt Delete the ATM address from the list of registered ATM addresses at a port The address is deleted from the M IB at the port in other words it is de registered Specify the ATM address by its member ID For a list of addresses registered by LMA together with their member IDs see Display Static ATM Addresses at Port on page 128 Only ATM addresses created via LMA can be deleted Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 4 S amp C Setup of Connections and ATM addresses 2 STP Static ATM Addresses Setup 3 DEL Delete
298. tics Display LEC Statistics Reset LAN Emulation Statistics Display M ulticast Addresses Destroy Specific LEC Restart ELAN Displays statistics for the LES and BUS in a specified ELAN Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 3 ELN ELANs Info 4 STS Statistics 1 GEN General LE Statistics Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range ELAN ID 1 16 For more information see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 Direct access sequence 2 2 3 4 1 parameters Command Result System action taken LES and BUS statistics for the specified ELAN are displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 2 2341 2 LES and BUS statistics for the ELAN with ELAN ID 2 are displayed as follows ES global counters Total number Total number Total number of of of of active active active elment S MAC addresses ATM addresses Total number of messag s accepted by Total number of the above messag s rejected by for all ecliemes s for all clismess DESE DESE total rejected becaus BUS global counters Number of received frames by BUS Number of transmitted frames from BUS Operation DD PARTY DID IPAANRCIESE IK ROR sy Awlnys S R A ADD PARTY ACK A D IB
299. ticular virtual circuit in the ATM fabric WAN Wide Area Network Data communications network spanning very large geographical areas INDEX Numbers 10BASE T RJ 45 Ethernet 30 3Com Transcend Enterprise Manager TEM 38 3Com bulletin board service 3Com BBS 440 3Com Facts 441 3Com Knowledgebase Web Services 439 3Com URL 439 A AAL5 control frame port statistics 202 AAL layer statistics displaying 199 resetting 201 ABR see Available Bit Rate active switch mode 87 ADD PARTY route 401 402 address registration general 31 address resolution forward request 292 admin access password updating 53 administration console 28 management capabilities 41 administrative status 94 147 149 displaying PNNI 336 set to DOWN 338 set to UP 337 aggregation token setting 385 ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode general 31 layer statistics 193 ATM address default 343 displaying 342 ESI End System Identifier 343 in connection 144 updating 344 ATM forum standards compliance 31 ATM Interface Module 421 compatibility with daughter cards 27 handling precautions 34 installing into chassis 38 major characteristics 421 422 multimode fiber 27 short reach single mode 27 ATM networks 29 ATM port administrative status 147 149 call ID 147 149 connection ID 147 149 connection type 147 149 connection VCI 147 149 connection VPI 147 149 operational status 147 149 originator 148 149 port ID 147 149 ATM Switch Fabric Module
300. tin Board Service are available at no charge and provide software and firmware upgrades a bug list and technical information about 3Com products WARRANTIES EXCLUSIVE IF A 3COM PRODUCT DOES NOT OPERATE AS WARRANTED ABOVE CUSTOMER S SOLE REM EDY FOR BREACH OF THAT WARRANTY SHALL BE REPAIR REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID AT 3COM S OPTION TO THE FULL EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND REM EDIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES TERM S OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IM PLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WARRANTIES TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION AND NON INFRINGEMENT ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED 3COM NEITHER ASSUM ES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS 3COM SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT OR MALFUNCTION IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY CUSTOMER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLECT IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEM PTS TO OPEN REPAIR OR MODIFY THE PRODUCT OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OTHER HAZARDS OR ACTS OF GOD LIMITATION OF LIABILITY TO THE FULL EXTENT A
301. tion on Hello packets see Information Exchange in PNNI on page 189 in the Operations Guide Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration TIM Timers 2 HHD Hello Holddown Timer 4 3 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range interval 1 30000 milliseconds Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The Hello holddown timer values is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 1 943415 The following message is displayed Default Value is 10 1 sec new value is 5 Press ENTER to continue Set Hello Interval Sets the Hello interval value In the absence of triggered Hellos the specified node will send one Hello packet on each of its ports every interval seconds A change to the Hello interval value takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI 1 9 4 3 NCF Node Configuration 4 TIM Timers 3 HIN Hello Interval 3 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range interval 1 30000 seconds Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 3 parameter
302. tions 31 Ethernet 31 general 31 PTSE checksum 406 delayed acknowledgment packets 364 displaying 405 holddown timer 357 lifetime factor 362 node address information 415 node information 410 peer group neighbor information 419 PGL election information 417 refresh interval 361 362 statistics information 420 table parameters 406 table parameters node address 407 table parameters node topology link 406 table parameters peer group neighbor 407 table parameters statistics 408 table parameters summary address 407 topology link information 412 unacknowledged 363 QSAAL signaling timers displaying 185 queue high priority 144 low priority 144 INDEX 455 resetting all parameters 77 NNI configuration 76 resident LECS address display 244 update 245 restore security configuration 327 retransmit interval setting 363 returning products for repair 443 RMON 30 RMON MIB 31 RMON2 30 route cache configuring 399 route cache state displaying 399 updating 400 RS 232 DB 9 control port 30 R read community string configuration displaying 64 read access password updating 51 realtime VBR Variable Bit Rate 375 administrative weight 387 optimization parameter 378 redundant switch mode 87 redundant ELAN general information 273 specific information 275 redundant LES general information 277 specific information 278 redundant LES from ELAN de assigning 270 redundant LES to ELAN assigning 269 remote login 28
303. tus 1d 8 120 4 Set amp save polling status 11852 121 4 Get polling timeout 1185 3 122 4 Set polling timeout 11854 123 4 Flash Setup Reset config to default 121 11 Reset all except IP addresses to default 122 78 Display TFTP download status 131 19 i Perform TFTP software download 132 81 Prepare for local RS232 download 133 82 Perform TFTP configuration upload 134 83 Perform TFTP configuration download 135 84 Table 64 M enu Index continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter Switch Module Setup Display switch status 141 86 11 Reset switch i42 88 11 Reset standby switch module 1431 89 11 Standby in service suspended 1432 90 11 Upgrade software files 14331 91 Interface Cards Get interface card info 151 92 Set port frame mode 1 5 3 96 Set port clock mode 154 97 Set loop mode 155 98 Reset interface card 15 6 99 Configuration flash status 16 102 Reboot 17 101 Switch Clock Synchronization Setup Get clock source status 181 107 Set external clock source 1 18 2 108 Set external clock source 2 18 3 109 Set clock source to internal 184 110 LECS Operations Get resident LECS address 211 244 8 Set resident LECS address 212 245 8 LECS get policy 213 246 8 428 APPENDIX B MENU INDEX Table 64 M enu Index continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence p
304. ty String public The current read community string is displayed Update Read Community String b gt Setting Up forManagement 65 Update the Read Community String of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The read community string is updated after the next reboot Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup MNG Management Setup 1 GET Read Community String Setup 2 SET Set Read Community String Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Read community string alphanumeric string up to 18 characters normally set to public or private Direct access sequence 1 1 2 5 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The read community string is updated System message display Read Community String was successfully set for the next reboot Example Enter 1 1 2 5 2 public The following message is displayed Read Community String was successfully set for the next reboot The read community string is updated to public and takes effect after the next reboot 66 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Display Current Write Community String Display the current Write Community String of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup MNG Management Setup SET Write Community String Setup 1 GET Get Write Community Str
305. uccessfully set The maximum VPI for port 3 1 2 is updated to 10 Signaling Setup 171 Display Signaling Display the current signaling protocol profile for the specified port Protocol Profile The signaling protocol profile of a port defines the role that the port plays in the signaling dialog with its attached device It can be Network or User When the port is connected to an end station or edge device the port is normally defined as Network when it is connected to another switch it is defined automatically as User or Network depending on their network prefixes For more information see Signaling Protocol Profile on page 92 in the Operations Guide The Network port is the one that defines the VPI VCI pair for the ATM connection Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform configuration 1 SET Switch setup 4 SIG Signaling setup 5 SPS Signaling protocol configuration setup 1 GPR Get profiles of ports Direct access sequence 11451 Command Result System action taken The current signaling protocol profile is displayed for all ports System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example 172 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Example Enter 1 1451 The following message is displayed Note that net refers to a Network side Usr refers to a User side Slots 1 5 are displayed Profile Port number lt M Sl QalSs Gil dh Gass SSI i a SGI
306. uding prerequisites m CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Switch Getting Started Guide An overview of the Switch and its components for a 7 slot chassis 8 slot chassis and 16 slot chassis a description of the power management subsystem information about what occurs when you start up your Switch how to use the documentation CD ROM and important safety and preinstallation information m Power Supply Installation Guides Instructions for installing and removing a power supply for the 7 slot chassis 8 slot chassis and 16 slot chassis m CoreBuilder 9000 Documentation Overview A list of all CoreBuilder 9000 documents m CoreBuilder 9000 Web Management User Guide Overview installation and troubleshooting information for the Web Management suite of applications that help you manage your system with a Web browser These documents are shipped with their individual modules or field replaceable units m Module Quick Start Guides or Getting Started Guides An overview LED status information and installation instructions for each interface module switch fabric module and management module m Module Command Quick Reference cards or booklets A list of the commands for managing each module m Fan Tray Removal and Replacement Guides Instructions for removing a faulty fan tray and installing a new one in the 7 slot chassis 8 slot chassis and 16 slot chassis m Module Release Notes An explanation of software issues and documentation iss
307. ues in the current release 22 ABOUT THIS GUIDE World Wide Web Site Documents Documents on CD ROM The Documentation CD ROM contains online versions of the paper guides that are shipped with your chassis and other CoreBuilder 9000 documents in online format only such as CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Management Engine User Guide How to use the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Management Engine EM E to manage the chassis and the network modules in the chassis CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Management Guide How to use configure and network the ATM Switch Fabric Module CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch Operations Guide A detailed explanation of networking theory network interface management and a description of the different protocols available in an ATM network CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Interface M odule User Guide How to use configure and manage the ATM Interface Module an explanation of networking theory and troubleshooting information CoreBuilder 9000 Implementation Guide Information about using features of the CoreBuilder 9000 Enterprise Switch after you install it and attach it to your network Command Reference Guide Information about the Administration Console commands that you use to configure the Switch This is a multiplatform guide It documents commands for the CoreBuilder 9000 as well as other 3Com systems M ost user guides and release notes are available in Adobe Acrobat Reader Portable Do
308. uest can fail if the ELAN State is NO LES meaning no LES is connected The Id of the primary LES The Id of the secondary LES Display Redundant LES General Information Display general information on a redundant LES Command Actions Enter menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken 2 LEM LAN Emulation 1 LCS LE Configuration Service 5 LNT LECS Network topology 9 RDN LE Service redundancy 6 RLG Display Redundant LESs general info 21596 The general redundant LES information is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the example Example Enter 2 159 6 The following information is displayed Id STATE Internal External 0 ESTABLISH INTERNAL ESTABLISH INTERNAL Redundant LES General Parameters Table 37 describes the redundant LES general parameters Table 37 Redundant LES General Parameters Parameter Description Id The LES Id number State The state of the LES This can be Establish Being Established or No Connection Internal External The location of the LES This can be Internal The LES is on the same switch as the LECS External The LES is not on the same switch as the LECS 278 Display Redundant LES Specific Information CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Display specific information on a redundant LES Command Actions Enter menu sequence
309. uilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch The default factory IP subnet mask address is 255 255 255 0 Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup MNG Management Setup MSK Subnet Mask Setup 2 SSM Set Subnet Mask 1 2 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Subnet mask address Valid subnet mask Direct access sequence 1 1 2 4 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The subnet mask address is updated System message display Subnet Mask address was successfully set for the next reboot Example Enter 1 1 2 4 2 255 255 0 0 The following message is displayed Subnet Mask address was successfully set for the next reboot The IP subnet mask is updated to 255 255 0 0 and takes effect after the next reboot 64 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Display Current Read Display the current Read Community String of the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Community String Enterprise Switch Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup MNG Management Setup GET Read Community String Setup 1 GET Get Read Community String 1 Direct access sequence 11251 Command Result System action taken The current read community string is displayed System message display Current Read Community String Example Enter 11251 The following message is displayed Current Read Communi
310. ule into the chassis match the upper and lower left and right module guides m When you insert the module into the chassis module guides do not twist or otherwise force the module into the chassis Pr cautions de S curit 35 Pr cautions de S curit Pe ie S Information sur la Pr vention de D charges Electrostatiques AN Lorsque on manipule les l ments du syst me CoreBuilder 9000 il faut bien respecter les pr cautions de s curit Pour viter des d charges lectriques des br lures des incendies ainsi que pour ne pas endommager l quipement veuillez bien lire et respecter les pr cautions suivantes AVERTISSEMENT Le syst me CoreBuilder 9000 contient nergie qui peut s av rer dangereuse Soyez tr s minutieux lorsque vous installez enlevez ou remplacez un M odule de Switch Fabric ATM AVERTISSEMENT Le Module de Switch Fabric ATM ne doit tre install enlev ou remplac que par personnel qualifi AVERTISSEM ENT Lorsque le syst me CoreBuilder 9000 est sous tension ne jamais ins rer des objets tels que tournevis ni m me des doigts portant des bijoux dans l emplacement d un module ouvert Lorsque le syst me est sous tension ne touchez aucune connexion du ch ssis avec les mains ou les doigts Ne pas ins rer d objets m talliques dans la face arri re AVERTISSEMENT Ne pas brancher allumer ou essayer de mettre en fonctionnement un module videmment d fectueux AVERTISSEM ENT
311. ult System action taken The number of PNNI nodes defined in the switch and the number of the current PNNI node index is displayed System message display Number of PNNI nodes is lt n gt Current PNNI node index is lt i gt Example Enter 1194311 The following message is displayed Number of PNNI nodes is 1 Current PNNI node index is 1 336 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Get Node Administrative Status Displays the administrative status of the PNNI node The administrative status of the node may be UP or DOWN Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 2 ADM Admin Status 1 GAS Get Node Admin Status Direct access sequence 1194321 Command Result System action taken The number and administrative status of the PNNI node are displayed System message display Node lt m gt of lt n gt PNNI Node Administrative Status is UP DOWN Example Enter 1194321 The following message is displayed Node 1 of 1 PNNI Node Administrative Status is UP Set Node Administrative Status to UP Updates the administrative status of the PNNI node to UP The change takes place immediately and is saved in flash memory for the next reboot Command Actions SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup 4 CFP Configure PNNI 3 NCF Node Configuration 2 A
312. ult Value is 5 new value is 10 Press ENTER to continue Set PTSE Refresh Interval Sets the PTSE refresh interval value The PTSE refresh interval is the amount of time in seconds that passes before the next PTSE is flooded to all the nodes in the current peer group A change to the PTSE refresh interval value takes place after the next reboot Command Actions Enter menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 1 SET Switch setup 9 PNI PNNI Setup CFP Configure PNNI NCF Node Configuration TIM Timers 5 PRI PTSE Refresh Interval 4 3 4 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range interval 1 60000 seconds Direct access sequence 1 1 9 4 3 4 5 parameters Command Result System action taken The Hello inactivity factor is displayed and is updated to its new value System message display Default value is lt x gt new value is lt y gt Example Enter 1 19 4 3 4 5 1500 The following message is displayed Default Value is 1800 new value is 1500 Press ENTER to continue 362 CHAPTER 11 CONFIGURING AND MANAGING PNNI Set PTSE Lifetime Factor Sets the PTSE lifetime factor value The PTSE lifetime factor is the value used to calculate the initial lifetime of a PTSE The PTSE refresh interval is multiplied by this percentage to obtain the initial lifetime factor A change to the PTSE lifetime factor value takes place after the next reb
313. umber of the output port The ATM address member of the destination If the source is not SVC this field does not appear Display Port Connections 145 Display Port Connections Display UME Address Port Connection You can display the port ATM connections m Display UME Address Port Connection m Display Static Address Port Connection m Display Inactive Address Port Connections For information about establishing port connections see External Links ATM Connections on page 85 in the Operations Guide Displays information about connections defined at a specific port Specify the connection by specifying VPI VCI values The connections belong to virtual channels created dynamically between UME ATM addresses Command Actions Enterthe menu sequence 3 CON Connections 3 PRT ATM ports 1 UME UME addresses Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port number lt slot group port gt VPI Enter a VPI value or A for all VPI values VCI Enter a VCI value ora for all VCI values Direct access sequence 3 3 1 parameters Command Result System action taken The connection information for the specified port is displayed System message display Information is displayed as shown in the examples 146 CHAPTER 7 CONFIGURING VIRTUAL CHANNELS Example Display all Connections at a Port Enter 3 3 1 Multiple ATM addresses at the port 1 1 1 are displayed where each ATM 1 1 1
314. ure to change the factory default IP address to a valid IP address that matches your network IP addresses 58 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Display the current NMS IP address where the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch sends event traps Display Current NMS IP Address Command Actions Enter the menu sequence Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 1 1 2 2 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup MNG Management Setup NMS NMS Setup 1 GNS Get NMS Address 1 1 2 2 11221 Current NMS IP address is displayed Current NMS address The following message is displayed Current NMS address 151 104 78 75 The current NMS IP address is displayed Setting Up forManagement 59 Update NMS Address Update the NMS IP address where the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch sends the event traps The factory default NMS address is 255 255 255 255 D gt The NMS IP address is changed after the next reboot Command Actions Enter the menu sequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration SET Switch Setup MNG Management Setup NMS NMS Setup 2 SNS Set NMS Address 1 2 2 Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range NMS address Valid IP address Direct access sequence 1 1 2 2 2 parameters Command Result System action taken The NMS address is updated System message display N
315. witch are restored to their factory default values 298 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Display LANE Multicast Forward Delay Display the LANE multicast forward delay For certain switches and bridges that connect to the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch you must configure a delay between a multicast send and a multicast forward Command Actions LEM LAN Emulation Enter menu sequence 2 LES LE Services ELN ELANs Information LSU LES Setup 9 GDL Get LANE multicast fwd delay 2 3 1 Direct access sequence 2 2 31 9 Command Result System action taken The LANE multicast forward delay is displayed in unit of 10 msecs System message display mcst delay in 10msec units lt n gt Example Enter 2 2319 The LANE multicast forward delay parameter is displayed as follows mcst delay in 10msec units 50 Update LANE Multicast Forward Delay Update the LANE multicast forward delay parameter Command Actions LEM LAN Emulation Enter menu sequence 2 LES LE Services ELN ELANs Information LSU LES Setup 10 SDL Set LANE Multicast Fwd Delay Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range LANE multicast forward 0 1 4 secs in10 msec units delay o no LANE multicast forward delay Direct access sequence 2 2 3 1 10 parameters Command Result System action taken The LANE multicast forward
316. xample Enter 1 5 3 5 1 1 0 The following messages are displayed The following settings will take place Changing port lt 5 1 1 gt setting from SONET mode to SDH mode Changing port lt 5 1 2 gt setting from SONET mode to SDH mode Changing port lt 5 1 3 gt setting from SONET mode to SDH mode Changing port lt 5 1 4 gt setting from SONET mode to SDH mode Do you really want to do these changes Y N y Enter y to confirm The following message is displayed Setting port frame mode has completed successfully The selected port s are set and saved Set Port Clock Mode Configuring Interface Modules 97 Set the port clock command mode of a selected port as Normal or Loop Timing and save to flash memory You are prompted to specify a port and a mode Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 5 IFC Interface Cards 4 PCK Set Port Clock Mode Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Port Number slot group port 0 0 For all Port Clock Mode o for Normal 1 for Loop timing Direct access sequence 1 5 4 parameters Command Result System action taken The clock operational mode of the selected port on the interface module is set and saved System message display Setting port clock mode command has completed successfully Example Enter 1 5 41 1 2 1 The following message is displayed Setting port clock mode command has completed
317. y 1114 54 10 defaults Management Setup Get IP address riza 56 10 Set amp save IP address 11212 57 10 Get NMS address 11221 58 10 Set amp save NMS address 11222 60 10 Get default gateway L d 2 3 60 10 Set default gateway 11232 61 10 424 APPENDIX B M ENU INDEX Table 64 M enu Index continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter Get subnet mask 11241 62 10 Set subnet mask 11242 63 10 Get read community string t i 25 1 64 10 Set read community string 11252 65 10 Get write community string 11261 66 10 Set write community string 11262 67 10 Get Ethernet type i ee es 68 10 Set Ethernet type 1127 2 69 10 Set management configuration to factory 1128 70 10 default NNI Setup NNI Get maximum number of hops tisi 164 6 NNI Set maximum number of hops 1132 165 6 NNI Get interface type Yi a3 12 4 NNI Set interface type 1134 75 4 Set NNI configuration to factory defaults LISS 76 4 Timer Resolution Setup Get timer resolution Lida ot a 180 6 Set timer resolution 11412 182 6 Signaling Setup Get Signaling Q93B timers 1142 183 6 Get VPI VCI range 1 tA 3 4 167 6 Set VPI VCI range Td E 169 6 Get Signaling QSAAL Configuration setup 1144 185 6 Table 64 M enu Index continued Direct Access Mgmt Guide Ops Guide Command Title Sequence page chapter Get profi
318. yed Completed successfully Download System Software by TFTP gt Downloading System Software 81 Perform TFTP software download Specify the Server IP address and software file names See the Release Notes for the full TFTP software download procedure The TFP download procedure runs in the background Therefore no message is displayed at the end of the procedure To check the status use the Display Software Download Status option For details see Display Software Download Status on page 79 Command Actions Enterthe menusequence 1 SYS Platform Configuration 3 LOA Load System Software 2 FTP Perform TFTP Software Download Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter Format or Range Server IP address lt 0 0 0 0 gt File name lt file name gt Direct access sequence 1 3 2 parameters Command Result System action taken Software is downloaded by TFTP to the CoreBuilder 9000 ATM Enterprise Switch System message display Download process started Example Enter 1 3 2 The following prompts are displayed Server IP address 100 1 0 131 Enter file name configl Start download from 100 1 0 131 configl Y N y The following message is displayed Download process started 82 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM Download System Software by Serial Port Prepare for local software download via RS 232 serial port There are two load modes load and operational See the Release Notes for t
319. you enter its number or its mnemonic identifier at the prompt symbol gt that is displayed below the menu item list You need to enter the first unique characters of the mnemonic identifier The hierarchical path from the Main Menu down to the currently displayed submenu option is displayed in front of the angle bracket prompt This convention helps you orient yourself in the menu hierarchy To illustrate how to work with the menu system the example in this section changes the read access password This example is shown in Figure 3 The following command description guides you through the execution of the command It specifies the menu sequence to enter the parameters to enter and their format the command results and any system messages A similar command description format is provided for each command in this manual Entering the Menu Sequence First enter the menu sequence in the order shown in section A of the Command Description on page 18 in the About This Guide section In this example you enter the menu item numbers but you can enter the three letter mnemonic code instead At the Main Menu prompt enter 1 The Platform Configuration M enu is displayed the second screen in Figure 3 followed by the path 1 sys and the gt prompt At the Platform Configuration Menu prompt enter 1 The Switch Setup Menu submenu is displayed the third screen in Figure 3 followed by the path 1 sys 1 seT and the gt prompt
320. ytes separated by a dot for all addresses Direct access sequence 2 2 3 5 Command Result System action taken Multicast addresses registered by the LECs are displayed System message display The address was set to multicast Example Enter 2 2 3 5 The following message is displayed The address was set to multicast 310 CHAPTER 9 MANAGING LAN EMULATION Destroy Specific LEC Deletes the specified LEC from the LES database Command Actions Enter menu sequence 2 LEM LAN Emulation 2 LES LE Services 3 ELN ELANs Information 6 DSL Destroy specific LEC Enter a parameter at the prompt Parameter ELAN ID LEC id Direct access sequence Command Result System action taken System message display Example Enter 2 2 3 6 Format or Range 1 16 see Display ELAN Parameters in LES Database on page 283 2 23 6 The specified LEC is removed L EC destroy request was sent to LI The following message is displayed LEC destroy request was sent to LES ES Restart ELAN Disconnect the control distribute channel to all LECs that are attached to the specified ELAN This feature enables the user to reset the LANE Services without rebooting the CoreBuilder 9000 for the following purposes m Shutdown of the redundant LANE Services to force all LECs to return to the primary LANE Services after a failure has occurred m Achieving

3Com 800ix-SMP Dishwasher User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents